529343
237
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/258
Next page
Dear Customer,
Thank you for selecting Fiat and congratulations on your choice of a Fiat Croma.
We have written this handbook to help you get to know all your new Fiat Croma features and use it in the best possible way.
You should read it right through before taking the road for the first time.
You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you derive the maximum from your
Fiat Croma technological features.
You are recommended to read carefully the warnings and indications, marked with the respective symbols, at the end of the page:
personal safety;
the car’s wellbeing;
environmental protection.
The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Fiat offers to its Customers:
the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity
the range of additional services available to Fiat Customers.
Best regards and good motoring!
This Owner Handbook describes all Fiat Croma versions. As a consequence, you should consider only
the information which is related to the engine and bodywork version of the car you purchased.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 1
MUST BE READ!
K
REFUELLING
Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95.
Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590.
Using other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and cause the forfeiture of the warranty cov-
er for caused damages as a consequence.
ENGINE STARTING
Petrol engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral (positions P or N with
automatic transmission); fully depress the clutch pedal (or brake pedal with automatic transmission) without press-
ing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to START and release it as soon as the engine has started.
Diesel engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral (positions P or N with
automatic transmission); fully depress the clutch pedal (or brake pedal with automatic transmission) without press-
ing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to ON and wait for the
Y
and
m
warning lights to go off; turn the
ignition key to START and release it as soon as the engine has started.
PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
While working, the catalyst develops a very high temperature. Do not park the car over grass, dry leaves, pine nee-
dles or any other inflammable materials: risk of fire.
RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
The car is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the components correlated with emissions to en-
sure better respect for the environment.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 2
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), visit a Fiat
Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car’s electric system can sup-
port the required load.
CODE card
Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the car.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety fea-
tures, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.
THE OWNER HANDBOOK CONTAINS…
… information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your car, and its maintenance.
Pay particular attention to the symbols
"
(personal safety)
#
(environmental protection) ! (the car’s wellbeing).
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 3
4
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT DASHBOARD........................................... 5
INSTRUMENT PANEL......................................................... 6
SYMBOLS................................................................................ 8
THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM.................................................. 9
THE KEYS ............................................................................... 10
ALARM .................................................................................... 14
DEAD LOCK DEVICE ......................................................... 16
IGNITION DEVICE .............................................................. 19
ON BOARD INSTRUMENTS ............................................ 20
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY ...................................... 22
RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY .. 25
DISPLAY FUNCTIONS........................................................ 28
TRIP COMPUTER................................................................. 36
SEATS....................................................................................... 39
HEAD RESTS.......................................................................... 42
STEERING WHEEL............................................................... 43
REAR VIEW MIRRORS ....................................................... 44
HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ................... 47
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER........................................ 49
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER................................ 52
EXTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................................. 62
WINDOW CLEANING ...................................................... 65
CRUISE CONTROL ............................................................. 68
CEILING LIGHTS.................................................................. 70
CONTROLS........................................................................... 71
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT..................................................... 74
SUN ROOF............................................................................. 78
DOORS ................................................................................... 81
ELECTRIC WINDOW REGULATORS ........................... 82
BOOT ...................................................................................... 84
ENGINE HOOD ................................................................... 90
ROOF RACK/SKI RACK..................................................... 92
HEADLAMPS.......................................................................... 93
ABS SYSTEM........................................................................... 94
ESP SYSTEM............................................................................ 96
ASR SYSTEM .......................................................................... 97
EOBD SYSTEM ...................................................................... 98
T.P.M.S. SYSTEM.................................................................... 99
CAR RADIO........................................................................... 100
USER PURCHASED ACCESSORIES................................. 101
PARKING SENSORS ............................................................ 102
VEHICLE REFUELLING........................................................ 104
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION................................. 105
DD
D
A
A
S
S
H
H
B
B
O
O
A
A
R
R
D
D
A
A
N
N
D
D
C
C
O
O
N
N
T
T
R
R
O
O
L
L
S
S
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 4
DASHBOARD
The presence and the position of the instruments and warning lights may vary according to the versions.
1. Side air vent - 2. Left steering column stalk: external lights - 3. Instrument panel and warning lights - 4. Right steering column
stalk: windscreen, rear window wiper and trip computer controls - 5. Central air vents - 6. Sound system - 7. Front passenger air
bag - 8. Glovebox - 9. Heating/ventilation/climate controls - 10. Gearshift lever - 11. Driver’s knees air bag - 12. Driver’s air bag -
13. Cruise control lever - 14. Control unit access door - 15. Control plate.
5
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
F0L0516m
fig. 1
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 5
6
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.8 - 1.9 Multijet 8V versions with
multifunctional display
A Speedometer (speed indicator)
B Fuel level gauge with reserve
warning light
C Engine coolant temperature gauge
and excessive temperature warning
light
D Rev counter
E multifunctional display
m
c
Warning lights fitted on
Multijet versions
t
Warning light fitted on versions
with automatic transmission
1.8 - 1.9 Multijet
8V with
reconfigurable multifunctional display
A Speedometer (speed indicator)
B Fuel level gauge with reserve
warning light
C Engine coolant temperature gauge
and excessive temperature warning
light
D Rev counter
E Reconfigurable multifunctional display
m
c
Warning lights fitted on
Multijet versions
t
Warning light fitted on versions
with automatic transmission
F0L0504m
F0L0505m
fig. 2
On versions 1.8 the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 8000 rpm.
On versions 1.8 the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 8000 rpm.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 6
7
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
2.2 - 1.9 Multijet 16V versions -
2.4 Multijet
20V with multifunctional
display
A Speedometer (speed indicator)
B Fuel level gauge with reserve
warning light
C Engine coolant temperature gauge
and excessive temperature warning
light
D Rev counter
E Multifunctional display
m
c
Warning lights fitted on
Multijet versions
t
Warning light fitted on versions
with automatic transmission
2.2 - 1.9 Multijet
16V - 2.4 Multijet 20V
with reconfigurable multifunctional
display
A Speedometer (speed indicator)
B Fuel level gauge with reserve
warning light
C Engine coolant temperature gauge
and excessive temperature warning
light
D Rev counter
E Reconfigurable multifunctional display
m
c
Warning lights fitted on
Multijet versions
t
Warning light fitted on versions
with automatic transmission
F0L0507m
F0L0506m
fig. 3
On Multijet versions the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 6000 rpm.
On Multijet versions the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 6000 rpm.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 7
8
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SYMBOLS
Special coloured labels have been attached
near or actually on some of the compo-
nents of your car. These labels bear sym-
bols that remind you of the precautions
to be taken as regards that particular com-
ponent.
The plate summarising the symbols used
can be found under the bonnet fig. 4.
fig. 4
F0L0099m
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 8
9
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
The electronic components in-
side the key may be damaged
if the key is submitted to sharp
knocks.
OPERATION
Each time the key is fitted into the ignition
switch, the Fiat CODE system control unit
sends a recognition code to the engine con-
trol unit to deactivate the inhibitor.
The code is sent only if the Fiat CODE sys-
tem control unit has recognised the code
transmitted from the key.
Each time the ignition key is removed, the
Fiat CODE system deactivates the func-
tions of the engine electronic control unit.
If the code has not been recognised cor-
rectly, the warning light
Y
(where pro-
vided) turns on accompanied by the relat-
ed message on the display (see chapter
“Warning lights and messages”).
In this case, the key should be removed and
refitted; if the lock continues, possibly try
again with the other key provided with the
car. If it is still not possible to start the car
contact a Fiat Dealership.
IMPORTANT Every key has its own code,
which must be memorised by the system
control unit. To memorise new keys, up to
a maximum of eight, apply to Fiat Dealer-
ship.
THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM
To further protect your car from theft, it
has been fitted with an engine immobilising
system. This system is automatically acti-
vated when the ignition key is removed.
An electronic device, in fact, is fitted in each
ignition key grip. The device transmits a ra-
dio-frequency signal when the engine is
started through a special aerial built into the
ignition switch. The modulate signal, which
changes each time the engine is started, is
the “password”, by means of which the
control unit recognises the key and enables
to start the engine.
Warning light
Y
coming on
when driving
If the warning light
Y
turns on, this
means that the system is running a
self-test (for example for a voltage
drop). At the first stop, turn the igni-
tion key to OFF and then back to
ON: if no failure is detected warning
light
Y
will not come on.
If the warning light
Y
stays on, re-
peat the procedure described previ-
ously leaving the key at OFF for over
30 seconds. Should the inconvenience
persists, contact a Fiat Dealership.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 9
10
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
THE KEYS
CODE CARD fig. 5
The car is delivered with two copies of the
ignition key and with the CODE card
which bears the following:
the electronic code A
the mechanical key code B to be giv-
en to the Fiat Dealership when order-
ing duplicate keys.
IMPORTANT In order to ensure perfect
efficiency of the electronic devices con-
tained inside the keys, they should never be
exposed to direct sunlight.
fig. 5
F0L0002m
All the keys and the CODE
card must be handed over to
the new owner when selling
the car.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 10
11
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL
fig. 6
This key operates the ignition switch.
Button Ë shall be used for remote open-
ing of doors and tailgate and for remote
deactivation of the alarm (where provid-
ed).
Button Á shall be used for remote lock-
ing of doors and tailgate and for remote
activation of the alarm (where provided).
Button R shall be used for remote
opening of the tailgate.
When unlocking the doors, the passen-
ger’s compartment lights will come on for
a preset time.
fig. 6
F0L0100m
Opening the doors and the tailgate
Briefly press button Ë for remote un-
locking of doors, tailgate and fuel filler cap
and simultaneous alarm (where provided)
deactivation, timed switching on of the in-
ternal ceiling lights and double flashing of
direction indicators.
Press button Ë for more than 2 seconds
to open the windows.
Doors will be unlocked automatically if the
fuel inertial cut-off switch comes into op-
eration.
The “Set-up menu” on the display (see
paragraph “Multifunction display”) enables
to set the system so that by pressing but-
ton Ë, only the driver’s door is unlocked.
In this event, to unlock the other doors
press quickly button Ë twice.
IMPORTANT If the remote control does
not work properly, it is still possible to
carry out the emergency opening proce-
dure by using the metal insert set inside
the remote control (see “Emergency
opening using the metal insert of the key”).
Locking the doors and the tailgate
Briefly press button Á for remote lock-
ing of doors, tailgate and fuel filler cap and
simultaneous alarm (where provided) ac-
tivation, switching off of the internal ceil-
ing lights and single flashing of direction in-
dicators.
Press button Á for more than 2 seconds
to close the windows. If the button is
briefly pressed twice, the dead lock device
is activated (see paragraph “Dead lock de-
vice”).
IMPORTANT If the remote control does
not work properly, it is still possible to
lock the car doors by following the pro-
cedure described in paragraph “Emer-
gency closing”
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 11
12
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Used batteries are harmful to
the environment. They should
be disposed of as specified by
law in the special containers
provided, or take them to a Fiat Deal-
ership, which will deal with their dis-
posal.
Opening the tailgate
by the remote control
Press button
R
to open the tailgate by
remote control even if the alarm (where
provided) is on.
Opening the tailgate is accompanied by the
direction indicators flashing twice; clos-
ing is accompanied by a single flash (only
if the alarm is on).
If the alarm is on, when the tailgate is
opened the alarm system switches off vol-
umetric protection and the tailgate
perimetral protection sensor.
When closing the tailgate again, volumet-
ric and perimetral protection sensors are
restored.
IMPORTANT If the remote control does
not work properly, it is however possi-
ble to open the tailgate through the me-
chanical lever set on the lock inside the
boot (see paragraph “Boot” in this sec-
tion).
LED signals on door lock button
fig. 7
When locking the doors, led A switches
on for about 3 seconds and than starts
flashing (deterrence function).
Once doors are locked, if one or more
doors or the tailgate are not closed cor-
rectly, the led and direction indicators
start flashing quickly.
Replacing the battery of the key
with remote control fig. 8
To replace the battery, proceed as follows:
move aside lever A and take out the
emergency metal insert B;
take out the battery case C using the
emergency metal insert, move aside
battery D and replace it making sure
the bias is correct;
refit the battery case C and the emer-
gency metal insert B inside the key.
Request for additional remote
controls
The system can recognise up to 8 keys with
incorporated remote control. Should a new
key with remote control be necessary, con-
tact a Fiat Dealership, taking with you the
CODE card and the keys, a personal iden-
tity document and the car’s ownership doc-
uments.
fig. 7
F0L00382m
fig. 8
F0L0101m
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 12
13
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
EMERGENCY CLOSING
fig. 11
To lock the doors if the remote control
does not work properly, proceed as fol-
lows:
fit the metal insert into the slot C set
on the doors and turn it in the direc-
tion of the arrow (as shown in the fig-
ure).
IMPORTANT Before carrying out the
emergency door locking, check whether
the independent boot locking function on
the multifunction display set-up menu is
off (see paragraph “Multifunction display”).
EMERGENCY OPENING USING
THE METAL INSERT
If the remote control does not work
properly (e.g.: battery flat), it is however
possible to use the emergency metal in-
sert set inside the remote control.
The metal insert operates the driver’s side
lock (the pawl is located under the out-
door handle fig. 9).
To use the metal insert set inside the re-
mote control, proceed as follows fig. 10:
move aside lever A and take out the
emergency metal insert B, at the same
time.
fig. 9
F0L0103m
fig. 10
F0L0102m
fig. 11
F0L0205m
The metal insert acts on the interested
door.
For emergency opening proceed as fol-
lows:
raise the handle, fit the metal insert in-
to the revolving plug and turn it coun-
terclockwise;
remove the key and lower the handle;
raise the handle and open the door.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 13
14
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
ALARM
(where provided)
WHEN THE ALARM
IS TRIGGERED
The alarm comes into action in the fol-
lowing cases:
unlawful opening of one of the doors,
bonnet or boot (perimetral protec-
tion);
attempt to start the engine with unau-
thorised key;
battery cable cutting;
presence of moving bodies in the pas-
senger’s compartment (volumetric
protection);
abnormal raising/sloping of the car.
Depending on the markets, the cutting in
of the alarm causes operation of the siren
and direction indicators (for about 26 sec-
onds). The ways of operating and the num-
ber of cycles may vary depending on the
markets.
A maximum number of sound/sight cycles
is however envisaged.
Volumetric and anti-raising protections
can be cut off by operating the front ceil-
ing light controls (see paragraphs “Volu-
metric protection sensors” and “Anti-rais-
ing sensor” on the following pages).
IMPORTANT The engine immobiliser
function is guaranteed by the Fiat CODE
system, which is automatically activated
when the ignition key is removed.
HOW TO ACTIVATE
THE ALARM fig. 12
With the doors, bonnet and boot shut and
ignition key to OFF or removed, point
the key with remote control or removed,
point the key with remote control in the
direction of the car, then press and release
the button
Á.
With the exception of certain markets,
the system sounds a “beep” and the doors
are locked.
Engagement of the alarm is preceded by
a self-diagnostic test. If a fault is detected
the system sounds a further warning
“beep” and the display shows the relevant
message (see section “Warning lights and
messages”).
In this case, switch the alarm system off by
pressing button Ë, check that the doors,
bonnet and tailgate are properly shut, then
switch the system on again by pressing
button Á.
fig. 12
F0L0100m
If the doors, bonnet and boot are shut
correctly and the warning “beep” is re-
peated, the system self-diagnostics has de-
tected a system operating fault. It is there-
fore necessary to contact a Fiat Dealer-
ship.
IMPORTANT Operating a door with the
metal insert of the key will not activate the
alarm.
IMPORTANT The alarm is built in com-
pliance with the law and regulations of the
different destination countries.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:29 Pagina 14
15
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
HOW TO DEACTIVATE
THE ALARM fig. 12
Press button
Ë
of the key with remote
control.
The system will react as follows (with the
exception of certain markets):
two brief flashes of the direction in-
dicators;
two brief “beeps”;
door unlocking.
IMPORTANT Operating a door with the
metal insert of the key will not activate the
alarm.
To deactivate the alarm, turn the ignition
key to ON.
fig. 13
F0L0171m
VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION
SENSORS
The volumetric sensors are located inside
the front ceiling light in the passenger’s
compartment. To make sure that the vol-
umetric sensors are working properly,
check that doors, boot, bonnet, windows
and sunroof (where provided) are shut.
Anti-raising protection
deactivation
If it is necessary to switch on the alarm
when animals or people are in the car,
press button A-fig. 13 on the front ceil-
ing light to deactivate the volumetric pro-
tection.
Deactivation is needed also in the pres-
ence of additional independent heater and
when it is switched on with the remote
control.
fig. 14
F0L0172m
ANTI-RAISING SENSOR
The anti-raising sensor detects any ab-
normal car raising/sloping, even partial
(e.g.: attempt to remove a wheel).
This sensor can detect the smallest car
sideslip angle changes, both longitudinally
and transversally. Sideslip angle changes
lower than 0.5°/min. (e.g.: slow tyre flat-
tening) are not considered).
Anti-raising protection
deactivation
To deactivate the anti-raising protection
(for example when towing the car with
alarm on) press button B-fig. 14 on the
front ceiling light. Sensor cut-out stays on
until activating the central door opening
again.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 15
16
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Once the dead lock device
has been actuated, doors
cannot be opened from inside the car
in any way whatsoever. For this rea-
son, make sure there are no persons
left inside the car.
INDICATIONS OF ATTEMPTS
TO BREAK IN
Any attempt to break in is indicated by
turning on of warning light
Y
(if pro-
vided) on the instrument panel with the
relevant message on the display (see sec-
tion “Warning lights and messages”).
HOW TO CUT OFF THE ALARM
SYSTEM
To deactivate the alarm system com-
pletely (for instance during prolonged in-
activity of the car) simply lock the car us-
ing the emergency locking.
IMPORTANT To cut-out the alarm if re-
mote control batteries are down or the
system is failing, fit the key into the igni-
tion switch and turn it to ON.
DEAD LOCK DEVICE
(where provided)
This safety device enables to inhibit:
door internal handles;
button A and B for locking/unlocking
the doors fig. 15;
thus hindering doors opening from inside
the passenger’s compartment in case of
attempt to break-into (e.g. window break-
ing).
The dead lock device guarantees the best
protection against unwanted access.
Therefore, it should be actuated every
time the car is parked and left unattend-
ed.
fig. 15
F0L0003m
WARNING
If the battery of the key with
remote control is down, the
dead lock device can be activated on-
ly using the metal insert of the key on
the driver’s side door as described pre-
viously: in this case the dead lock de-
vice is active only on the rear doors.
WARNING
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 16
17
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Device activation fig. 16
The device is automatically activated on
every door in the following cases:
pressing twice button
Á
of the key
with remote control
fig. 16
F0L0100m
Device deactivation
The device is deactivated automatically on
every door in the following cases:
when unlocking the doors by the re-
mote control;
when unlocking only the driver’s door
by the remote control;
when turning the ignition key to ON.
Device activation is signalled by three
flashes of the direction indicators and
flashing of the led on the driver door pan-
el (see the table on next page).
Should one of the doors be not perfectly
closed, the dead lock device is not acti-
vated, thus preventing that a person get-
ting into the car from the open door re-
mains blocked inside the passenger’s com-
partment when he/she closes the door.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 17
18
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
The main functions that can be activated with the keys or with the emergency metals insert are the following:
Key with
remote control
Emergency
metal
insert
Direction
indicators
flashing (only
with key with
remote control)
LED on door lock
button
IMPORTANT The emergency metal insert will unlock only the door.
IMPORTANT Window opening operation is a consequence of a door unlocking control; window closing operation is a consequence
of a door locking control.
Door opening
and fuel
filler cap
unlocking
Press briefly
button
Ë
Turn the key in a
counter clockwise
direction
(driver's side)
2 flashings
Turning off
deterrence led
Door closing
and fuel
filler cap
locking
Pressing briefly
button Á
Turn the key
in a clockwise
direction
(driver's side)
1 flashing
Turning on fixed
for about 3
seconds, followed
by deterrence
led flashing
Window
opening
Prolonged
pressing
(over 2 seconds)
on button Ë
2 flashings
Turning off
deterrence led
Window
closing
Prolonged
pressing
(over 2 seconds)
on button Á
1 flashing
Deterrence led
flashing
Dead lock
(where
provided)
Double pressing
on button Á
3 flashings
Double flashing,
followed by
deterrence led
flashing
Tailgate
opening
Pressing on
button R
2 flashings
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 18
19
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
IGNITION SWITCH
The key can be turned to 3 different po-
sitions fig. 17:
OFF: engine off, key can be removed,
steering column locked. Certain elec-
trical devices (e.g.: sound system, pow-
er windows…) can work.
ON: driving position. All electrical de-
vices are powered.
START: engine starting.
The ignition switch is fitted with an elec-
tronic safety system that, in the event the
engine is not started, turns back the igni-
tion key to OFF before repeating the
starting operation.
fig. 17
F0L0004m
If the ignition device is tam-
pered with (e.g.: attempted
theft), have it checked over by a Fiat
Dealership as soon as possible.
WARNING
When getting out of the car,
always remove the key to
prevent any occupants from acci-
dentally activating the controls. Re-
member to engage the handbrake
and if the car is parked on uphill slope
to engage the first gear. If the car is
facing downhill, engage the reverse
gear (position P with automatic trans-
mission). Never leave unsupervised
children in the car.
WARNING
STEERING COLUMN LOCK
Engaging
The steering column lock will engage 5
seconds after removing the key from the
ignition switch (engine off).
Disengaging
The steering column lock will disengage
after fitting the key into the ignition switch.
IMPORTANT Switching the engine off
when the car is running will not engage the
steering column lock. The multifunction
display will show the relevant message
(see section “Warning lights and Mes-
sages”).
IMPORTANT If, after trying to turn the
instrument panel on and/or to start the
engine, the display will show the message
“Check vehicle protection system”, repeat
the operation rocking the steering wheel
to facilitate steering unlocking. Displaying
of this message does not impair steering
column lock operation.
IMPORTANT When the vehicle is mo-
ving, the electronic key must remain in the
ignition device. That ensures that the stee-
ring lock is disabled during vehicle hand-
ling (e.g., when the vehicle is towed).
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 19
20
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
When the engine is idling, the rev counter
may indicate a gradual or sudden higher-
ing of the speed.
This is normal as it takes place during nor-
mal operation, for example when activat-
ing the climate control system or the fan.
In particular a slow change in the speed
preserves the battery charge.
INSTRUMENTS
REV. COUNTER fig. 18
Rev counter shows engine rpm.
The rev. counter end of scale values can
vary based on the version.
IMPORTANT The electronic injection
control system gradually shuts off the flow
of fuel when the engine is “over-revving”
resulting in a gradual loss of engine pow-
er.
It is absolutely forbidden to
carry out whatever after-
market operation involving steering
system or steering column modifica-
tions (e.g.: installation of anti-theft
device) that could badly affect per-
formance and safety, cause the lapse
of warranty and also result in non-
compliance of the car with homolo-
gation requirements.
WARNING
fig. 18
FF0L0512m
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 20
21
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
If the needle reaches the red
area, stop the engine immedi-
ately and contact a Fiat Deal-
ership.
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE GAUGE fig. 20
The turning on of the warning light B in-
dicates that the coolant fluid temperature
is too high; in this case, stop the engine
and contact a Fiat Dealership.
This shows the temperature of the engine
coolant fluid and begins working when the
fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.
Under normal conditions, the needle
should move to different positions of the
scale according to the working conditions
and engine cooling conditions.
FUEL LEVEL GAUGE fig. 19
This shows the amount of fuel left in the
fuel tank.
The reserve warning light A turns on to
indicate that approx. 7 to 9 litres of fuel
are left in the tank.
E - tank empty.
F - tank full (see the indications given in
paragraph “At the filling station").
Do not travel with the fuel tank almost
empty: the gaps in fuel delivery could dam-
age the catalyst.
IMPORTANT If the needle sets at the bot-
tom of the scale (low temperature) with
warning light B on, it means that the sys-
tem is malfunctioning. Contact a Fiat Deal-
ership to have the system inspected.
SPEEDOMETER fig. 21
It shows the engine speed.
The speed indicator end of scale values
can vary based on the version.
fig. 19
FF0L0513m
fig. 20
F0L0514m
fig. 21
km/h
F0L0515m
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 21
22
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
MULTIFUNCTION
DISPLAY
(where provided)
The vehicle may have a multifunctional dis-
play that provides the user with useful in-
formation, based on what was previously
set, while driving.
“STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 22
The standard screen shows the following
indications:
A Date
B Odometer (covered km or miles)
C Clock
D External temperature
E Headlight aiming position (only with
dipped beam headlights on).
Note When opening one of the front
doors, the display will turn on and show
for a few seconds the clock and the km or
mi covered.
CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 23
+ To scroll the displayed menu and the
related options upwards or to increase
the value displayed.
MODE Brief press to open the menu
and/or to move to next screen
or to confirm the option re-
quired.
Long press to go back to the
standard screen.
To scroll the displayed menu and the
related options downwards or to de-
crease the value displayed.
Note Buttons + and activate different
functions according to the following situ-
ations:
To adjust light inside the passenger
compartment
– to adjust instrument panel, sound sys-
tem and automatic climate control system
display brightness when standard screen
is active.
Setup menu
– to scroll the menu options upwards and
downwards;
– to increase or decrease values during set-
tings.
F0L0029m
fig. 23
fig. 22
F0L0071m
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 22
23
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SETUP MENU fig. 24
The menu comprises a series of functions
arranged in a “circular fashion” which can
be selected through buttons + and to
access the different select operations and
settings (setup) given in the following para-
graphs.
The setup menu can be activated by press-
ing briefly button MODE, only with the
car turned on (with car off, only the re-
duced menu can be displayed).
Single presses on buttons + or will scroll
the setup menu options.
Handling modes differ with each other ac-
cording to the characteristic of the option
selected.
NOTE If the car is equipped with the Ra-
dionavigation System, the only functions
that can be adjusted/set through the in-
strument panel display are the following:
“Speed limit”, “Automatic headlight day-
light sensor” (where provided) and “S.B.R.
(Seat Belt Reminder) buzzer reactivation”
(where provided). The other functions are
displayed by and can be adjusted/set
through the Radionavigation System dis-
play.
Selecting a menu option
– press briefly button MODE to select
the menu option to set;
– press buttons + or (by single press-
es) to select the new setting;
– press briefly button MODE to store the
new setting and to go back to the previ-
ously selected menu option.
Selecting “Date” and “Set Clock”:
– briefly press button MODE to select
the first value to change (e.g. hours /min-
utes or year / month / day);
– press buttons + or (by single press-
es) to select the new setting;
– briefly press button MODE to store the
new setting and to go to the next setup
menu option, if this is the last one you will
go back to the previously selected option of
the main menu.
Press button MODE for long:
– to quit the setup menu and to save on-
ly the settings stored yet by the user (and
confirmed by pressing briefly button
MODE).
The setup menu displaying is timed; when
quitting the menu due to timing expiry,
only settings stored yet by the user (and
confirmed by pressing briefly button
MODE) will be saved.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 23
24
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Day
Year
MODE
briefly
press
button
Month
Deutsch
Português
English
Español
Français
Italiano
Nederland
Polski
Example:
BELT BUZZER
SPEED BEEP
HEADL. SENSOR
SET TIME
SET DATE
SEE RADIO
KEY
AUTOCLOSE
UNITS
LANGUAGE
BUZZER VOLUME
BUTTON VOL.
EXIT MENU
SERVICE
TRIP B DATA
fig. 24
Example:
MODE
briefly
press
button
Briefly press button MODE to start surfing from the
standard screen. To surf the menu use buttons + or .
Note For safety reasons, when the car is running, it is
possible to access only the reduced menu (for setting
the “Speed limit”). When the car is stationary access
to the whole menu is enabled. On cars provided with
the Connect Nav+ system, many functions are displayed
on the navigator display.
F0L1195g
Turkçe
Brasilian
PASSENGER BAG
REAR SIDEBAGS
MENU
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 24
25
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
RECONFIGURABLE
MULTIFUNCTION
DISPLAY
(where provided)
The car can be provided with the recon-
figurable multifunction display that shows
useful information, according to the pre-
vious settings made, necessary when dri-
ving.
“STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 25
The standard screen shows the following
indications:
A Time
B Date
C Odometer (displays the kilometres, or
miles, covered)
D Vehicle status signals (ex. doors open
or the presence of ice on the road,
etc.)
E Headlamp stability position (only with
low beams on)
F External temperature
Note When opening one of the front
doors, the display will turn on and show
for a few seconds the clock and the km or
mi covered.
CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 26
+ To scroll the displayed menu and the
related options upwards or to increase
the value displayed.
MODE Brief press to open the menu
and/or to move to next screen or to con-
firm the option required.
Long press to go back to the standard
screen.
To scroll the displayed menu and the
related options downwards or to de-
crease the value displayed.
Note Buttons + and activate different
functions according to the following situ-
ations:
to adjust instrument panel, sound sys-
tem and automatic climate control sys-
tem display brightness when standard
screen is active;
to scroll the menu options upwards and
downwards;
to increase or decrease values during set-
tings.
F0L0029m
fig. 26
fig. 25
E
F
D
C
A
B
F0L0518m
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 25
26
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SETUP MENU fig. 27
The menu comprises a series of functions
arranged in a “circular fashion” which can
be selected through buttons + and to
access the different select operations and
settings (setup) given below. For certain
options (Set time and Units) there is a sub-
menu.
The setup menu can be activated by press-
ing briefly button MODE.
Single presses on buttons + or will scroll
the setup menu options. Handling modes
differ with each other according to the
characteristic of the option selected.
If the car is equipped with Connect Nav+,
the only functions that can be adjusted/set
through the instrument panel display are
the following: “Dimmer”, “Speed Beep”,
“Headl. sensor” (where provided), “Belt
buzzer” and “Passenger bag”. The other
functions are displayed by and can be ad-
justed/set through the Connect Nav+ sys-
tem display.
Selecting an option in the main menu
without submenu:
– press briefly button MODE to select
the menu option to set;
– press buttons + or (by single press-
es) to select the new setting;
– press briefly button MODE to store the
new setting and to go back to the previ-
ously selected menu option.
Selecting an option in the main menu with
submenu:
– press briefly button MODE to display
the first submenu option;
– press buttons + or (by single press-
es) to scroll all submenu options;
– press briefly button MODE to select
the displayed submenu option and to en-
ter the relevant setup menu;
– press buttons + or (by single press-
es) to select the new setting;
– press briefly button MODE to store the
new setting and to go back to the previ-
ously selected submenu option.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 26
27
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Day
Year
Month
English
Portugês
Español
Français
Deutsch
Italiano
SEAT BELT BUZZER
TRIP B DATA
SET DATE
SEE RADIO
KEY
AUTOCLOSE
UNITS
LANGUAGE
BUZZER VOLUME
BUTTON VOLUME
SERVICE
Briefly press button MODE to start surfing from the standard
screen. To surf the menu use buttons + or -. Note For safe-
ty reasons, when the car is running, it is possible to access on-
ly the reduced menu (for setting “Dimmer” and “Speed Beep”).
When the car is stationary access to the whole menu is enabled.
On cars provided with Connect Nav+ many functions are dis-
played on the navigator display.
Example:
fig. 27
FF0L4023g
SET TIME
HEADLAMP SENSOR
SPEED BEEP
EXIT MENU
Nederlands
PASSENGER AIRBAG
Turkçe
Brasilian
MODE
briefly press
button
MODE
briefly press
button
REAR SIDEBAGS
MENU
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 27
28
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Note The possible setting is between 30
and 250 km/h, or between 20 and 155
mph depending on the unit set previous-
ly (see “Distance unit (Dist. Unit)” para-
graph described later. Every press on but-
ton +/increases/decreases by 5 units.
Keeping the button +/ pressed obtains
the automatic fast increase or decrease.
When you are near the required setting
complete adjustment by single presses.
– briefly press button MODE to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings.
To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MODE: (On) will
flash on the display;
– press button : (Off) will flash on the
display;
– briefly press button MODE to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings.
Speed Beep (Speed limit)
With this function it is possible to set the
car speed limit (km/h or mph); when this
limit is exceeded the driver is immediate-
ly alerted (see section “Warning lights and
messages”).
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MODE, the display
will show wording (Speed Beep);
– press button + or to select activation
(On) or deactivation (Off) of the speed
limit;
– if selecting (On), press button + or
to select the required speed limit and then
press MODE to confirm.
DISPLAY FUNCTIONS
(see Multifunctional display or Reconfigurable multifunctional display)
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 28
29
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Headlamp sensor
(Automatic headlight sensor
sensitivity adjustment)
(where provided)
With this function it is possible to adjust
the light sensor sensitivity according to 3
levels (level 1 = min. level, level 2 = av-
erage level, level 3 = max. level); the high-
er the sensitivity is, the lower is the ex-
ternal light intensity required to switch on
the lights.
To set the light level required, proceed as
follows:
– briefly press button MODE, the previ-
ously set level will flash on the display;
– press button + or to select the re-
quired level;
– briefly press button MODE to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings.
Trip B data (Trip On/Off)
Through this option it is possible to acti-
vate (On) or deactivate (Off) the Trip B
(partial trip).
For further information see “Trip com-
puter”.
For activation / deactivation, proceed as
follows:
– briefly press button MODE: On or Off
will flash on the display according to pre-
vious setting;
– press button + or to select the re-
quired level;
– briefly press button MODE to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings.
Set time (Setting the clock)
This function enables to set the clock
through two sub-menus: “Time” and
“Mode”.
Proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MODE, the display
will show the two submenus “Time” and
“Mode”;
– press button + or to scroll the two
submenus;
– select the required submenu and then
press briefly MODE;
– if selecting “Time”: briefly press button
MODE, “hours” will flash on the display;
– press button + or for setting;
– press button MODE, “minutes” will
flash on the display;
– press button + or for setting.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 29
30
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Note Every press on button + or in-
creases/decreases by 1 unit. Keeping the
button pressed obtains automatic fast in-
crease or decrease. When you are near
the required setting complete adjustment
by single presses.
– if selecting “Mode”: briefly press but-
ton MODE, “24h” or “12h mode will
flash on the display;
– press button + or to select “24h” or
“12h”.
After setting, briefly press button MODE
to go back to the submenu screen or
press the button for long to go back to the
main menu screen without storing set-
tings.
– press again button MODE for long to
go back to the standard screen or to the
main menu according to the current menu
level.
Set date (Setting the date)
This function enables to update the date
(day – month – year).
To correct the date proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MODE: “year” will
flash on the display;
– press button + or for setting;
– briefly press button MODE: “month”
will flash on the display;
– press button + or for setting;
– briefly press button MODE: “day” will
flash on the display;
– press button + or for setting.
Note Every press on button + or in-
creases/decreases by 1 unit. Keeping the
button pressed obtains automatic fast in-
crease or decrease. When you are near
the required setting complete adjustment
by single presses.
– briefly press button MODE to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings.
See radio (Audio repetition)
With this function the display repeats in-
formation relevant to the sound system.
– Radio: selected radio station frequency
or RDS message, automatic tuning acti-
vation or AutoSTore;
– audio CD, MP3 CD: track number;
– CD Changer: CD number and track
number;
– Cassette: operating method.
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off)
sound system info displaying proceed as
follows:
– briefly press button MODE: On or Off
will flash on the display according to pre-
vious setting;
– press button + or to select the re-
quired level;
– briefly press button MODE to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 30
31
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Key
With this function it is possible to decide
the door opening mode by selecting one
of the following options:
– open doors: to unlock all doors, except
the tailgate
– open driver’s door (op. drv. door): to
unlock just the driver’s door (where pro-
vided)
– open all: to unlock every door includ-
ing the tailgate
The car is delivered with this function in
“Open all” mode.
Proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MODE, the previ-
ous setting will flash on the display;
– press button + or for setting;
– briefly press button MODE to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings.
Autoclose (Automatic central
door locking when travelling)
When activated (On), this function locks
automatically the doors when the car
speed exceeds 20 km/h.
To activate or to deactivate this function
proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MODE to display
the submenu;
– briefly press button MODE: On or Off
will flash on the display according to pre-
vious setting;
– press button + or to select the re-
quired level;
– briefly press button MODE to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings;
Press again button MODE for long to
go back to the standard screen or to the
main menu according to the current menu
level.
Units (Setting units)
With this function it is possible to set the
units through the submenu: “Distances”,
“Consumption” and “Temperature”
(where provided).
To set the required unit proceed as fol-
lows:
– briefly press button MODE, the display
will show the submenus;
– press button + or to scroll the sub-
menus;
– select the required submenu and then
press briefly button MODE;
– if selecting “Distances”: pressing button
MODE briefly, the display will show “km”
or “mi” according to previous setting;
– press button + or to select the re-
quired level;
– if selecting “Consumption”: briefly press
button MODE the display will show
“km/l”, “l/100km” or “mpg” according to
previous setting;
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 31
32
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
If the distance unit set is “km” the fuel con-
sumption unit will be displayed in km/l or
l/100km.
If set unit is “mi” the display will show fu-
el consumption in “mpg”.
– press button + or to select the re-
quired level;
– if selecting “Temperature”: pressing but-
ton MODE briefly, the display will show
“°C” or “°F” according to previous set-
ting;
– press button + or to select the re-
quired level.
After setting, briefly press button MODE
to go back to the submenu screen or
press the button for long to go back to the
main menu screen without storing set-
tings.
– press again button MODE for long to
go back to the standard screen or to the
main menu according to the current menu
level.
Language (Selecting the language)
Display messages can be shown (after set-
ting) in different languages: Italian, German,
English, Spanish, French, Portuguese, Pole
(where provided) Turkish and Brazilian.
To set the required language proceed as
follows:
– briefly press button MODE: the previ-
ously set “language” will flash on the dis-
play;
– press button + or to select the re-
quired level;
– briefly press button MODE to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings.
Buzzer volume
(Setting the buzzer volume)
With this function the volume of the
buzzer accompanying any failure/warning
indication can be adjusted according to 8
levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MODE: the previ-
ously set volume “level” will flash on the
display;
– press button + or for setting;
– briefly press button MODE to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 32
33
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Button volume
(Adjusting the button volume)
With this function the volume of the
roger-beep accompanying the activation
of buttons MODE, + and can be ad-
justed according to 8 levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MODE: the previ-
ously set volume “level” will flash on the
display;
– press button + or for setting;
– briefly press button MODE to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings.
Seat belt buzzer
(S.B.R. buzzer reactivation)
This function can be only displayed after
Fiat Dealership has deactivated the S.B.R.
system (see paragraph “S.B.R. system” in
section “Safety devices”).
Service (Scheduled Servicing)
This function displays information relat-
ed to kilometric or time based frequen-
cies for maintenance checks.
Proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MODE: service in
km or mi, according to previous setting,
will be displayed (see paragraph “Distance
unit”);
– briefly press button MODE to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings.
Note The “Service schedule” includes car
maintenance every 30,000 km (or 18,000
miles) or every year; this is shown auto-
matically, with the ignition key at ON,
starting from 2,000 km (or equivalent val-
ue in miles) or 30 days from this deadline
and it is shown again every 200 km (or
equivalent value in miles). Below 200 km
servicing indications are displayed more
frequently. Servicing indication will be dis-
played in km or mi according to previous
setting. When a programmed maintenance
interval (coupon) is near to come, turning
the ignition key to ON, the display will
show the message “Service” followed by
the number of km/mi or days to go before
car servicing. Contact a Fiat Dealership to
carry out any service operation provided
by the “Service schedule” and to reset the
display.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 33
34
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Passenger airbag
Turning the passenger side front
and side chest protection air bags
on/off (Side Bags) (if foreseen)
fig. 28
This function is used to turn the passen-
ger side front and side chest protection
air bags on/off (Side Bags).
Proceed as follows:
– press button MODE and, after display-
ing of messages (Passenger airbag: off) (to
deactivate) or (Passenger airbag: on) (to
activate) by pressing buttons + and ,
press again button MODE;
– display will show the confirmation mes-
sage;
– press buttons + or to select (Yes) (to
confirm activation/deactivation) or (No)
(to abort);
– briefly press button MODE, to display
the confirmation message and to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings.
MODEMODE
MODE
F0L4016g
F0L4014g
F0L4015g
MODE
F0L4011g
F0L4012g
+
+
+
+
F0L4013g
fig. 28
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 34
35
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Rear Sidebags
Turning the rear side chest
protection air bags on/off
(Rear side bags) (if foreseen)
fig. 29
This function is used to turn the rear side
chest protection air bags on/off (Rear Side
Bags).
Proceed as follows:
– press the MODE button and, after dis-
playing the message on the screen (Rear
Sidebags: off) (to turn off) or the message
(Rear Sidebags: on) (to turn on) using the
+ and buttons, press the MODE but-
ton again;
– display will show the confirmation mes-
sage;
– press buttons + or to select (Yes) (to
confirm activation/deactivation) or (No)
(to abort);
– briefly press button MODE, to display
the confirmation message and to go back
to the menu screen or press the button
for long to go back to the standard screen
without storing settings.
MODEMODE
F0L4022g
F0L4020g
F0L4021g
MODE
F0L4017g
F0L4018g
+
+
+
+
F0L4019g
MODE
fig. 29
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 35
36
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Exit Menu
This is the last function that closes the cir-
cular setting cycle listed in the initial menu
screen.
Briefly press button MODE to go back to
the standard screen without storing set-
tings.
Press button to return to the first menu
option.
Both functions are resettable (reset - start
of new mission).
“General Trip” displays the figures relat-
ing to:
– Range
– Trip distance
– Average consumption
– Instant consumption
– Average speed
– Travel time (driving time).
“Trip B” (only available on reconfigurable
multifunction display), displays the figures
relating to:
– Trip distance B
– Average consumption B
– Average speed B
– Travel time B (driving time).
Note The “Trip B” function can be ex-
cluded (see paragraph “Trip B On/Off”).
“Range” cannot be reset.
TRIP COMPUTER
(where provided)
General features
The “Trip computer” is provided on cars
fitted with multifunction display or re-
configurable multifunction display.
The “Trip computer” displays information
(with ignition key at ON), relating to the
operating status of the car. This function
comprises the “General trip” concerning
the “complete mission” of the car (jour-
ney) and “Trip B”, (only available on re-
configurable multifunction display), con-
cerning the partial mission of the car; this
latter function (as shown in fig. 31) is “con-
tained” within the complete mission.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 36
37
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Values displayed
Range
Estimated distance which can be travelled
with the fuel currently in the tank, keep-
ing the same driving style. The display will
show “----” in the following cases:
– value lower than 50 km (or 30 mi)
– car left parked with engine running for
long.
IMPORTANT The variation of the auton-
omy value can be influenced by different
factors: driving style (see what is described
in paragraph “Driving style” in the chap-
ter “Start-up and driving”), type of route
(highways, urban, mountain, etc…), use
conditions of the car (load transported,
tire pressure, etc…). What was described
previously must be taken in consideration
when planning a trip.
Trip distance
This value shows estimated distance cov-
ered from the start of the new mission.
Average consumption
Average fuel consumption since the start
of the new mission.
Instant consumption
This value shows instant fuel consumption
(this value is updated second by second).
If parking the car with engine on,
the display will show “----”.
Average speed
This value shows the car average speed as
a function of the overall time elapsed since
the start of the new mission.
Travel time
This value shows the time elapsed since
the start of the new mission.
IMPORTANT Lacking information, Trip
computer values are displayed with “----”.
When normal operating condition is re-
set, calculation of different units will
restart regularly. Values displayed before
the failure will not be reset.
TRIP button fig. 30
Button TRIP, set on the top of the right
steering column stalk, shall be used (with
ignition key at ON) to display and to re-
set the previously described values to start
a new mission:
– short push to display the different val-
ues
– long push to reset and then start a new
mission.
New mission
New mission starts after:
– “manual” resetting by the user, by press-
ing the relevant button;
– “automatic” resetting, when the “Trip dis-
tance” reaches 9999.9 km or when the
“Travel time” reaches 99.59 (99 hours and
59 minutes);
– after disconnecting/reconnecting the
battery.
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 37
38
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
IMPORTANT The reset operation in the
presence of the screens concerning the
“General Trip” makes it possible to reset
also the “Trip B”. The reset operation in
the presence of the screens concerning
only the “Trip B” makes it possible to re-
set only the information associated with
this function.
Start of journey procedure
With ignition key at ON, press and keep
button TRIP pressed for over 2 seconds
to reset.
F0L0070m
fig. 30
Reset TRIP B
End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission
End of partial mission
Start of new
partial mission
Reset TRIP B
End of partial mission
Start of new
partial mission
Reset GENERAL TRIP
End of complete mission
Start of new mission
Reset GENERAL TRIP
End of complete mission
Start of new mission
End of partial mission
Start of new
partial mission
Reset TRIP B
Reset TRIP B
TRIP B
TRIP B
TRIP B
GENERAL TRIP
˙
˙
˙
˙
˙
˙
˙
˙
fig. 31
001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:30 Pagina 38
SEATS
MANUALLY ADJUSTABLE
FRONT SEATS fig. 32
Moving the seat backwards
or forwards
Lift the lever A and push the seat forwards
or backwards: in the driving position the
arms should rest on the rim of the steer-
ing wheel.
Height adjustment
Move repeatedly lever B upwards or
downwards to achieve the required
height.
IMPORTANT Adjustment must be car-
ried out only seated in the driver’s seat.
Back rest angle adjustment
Turn the knob C.
39
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
fig. 32
F0L0376m
For maximum safety, keep
the back of your seat up-
right, lean back into it and make sure
the seat belt fits closely across your
chest and hips.
WARNING
Only make adjustments
when the car is stationary.
WARNING
Once you have released the
lever, check that the seat is
firmly locked in the runners by trying
to move it back and forth. Failure to
lock the seat in place could result in
the seat moving suddenly and the dri-
ver losing control of the car.
WARNING
Lumbar adjustment
(where provided)
To adjust, turn the knob D.
Fabric upholstery of your car
is purpose-made to withstand
common wear resulting from
normal use of the car. It is
however absolutely necessary to pre-
vent hard and/or prolonged scratch-
ing/scraping caused by clothing acces-
sories like metallic buckles, studs, “Vel-
cro” fixings, etc. that stressing locally
the fabric could break yarns and dam-
age the upholstery as a consequence.
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 39
Seat warming fig. 34
With ignition key at ON, press button F
to switch the seat warming on/off. The led
on the button will light up when the func-
tion is on.
40
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Tilting the back rest
(where provided) fig. 33
Move repeatedly lever E upwards or
downwards to achieve the required po-
sition.
IMPORTANT Adjustment must be car-
ried out only seated in the driver’s seat.
fig. 33
F0L0136m
fig. 34
F0L0199m
fig. 35
F0L0104m
Front passenger’s seat “table”
tilting (where provided) fig. 35
To tilt the seat, lift lever A and fold the
back rest at the same time.
To reset it to normal position, operate
lever A and at the same time raise the
back rest until hearing the coupling/lock-
ing click.
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 40
ELECTRICALLY ADJUSTABLE
FRONT SEATS
(where provided) fig. 36
Adjustment is possible when the ignition
key is at ON or within 1 minute with ig-
nition key at OFF or removed, or for
three minutes after opening the doors.
Moving the seat backwards or
forwards and seat height
adjustment
Use control A.
Back rest angle adjustment
Use control B.
Height adjustment
Use control A to adjust the height of the
front or rear part of the seat.
fig. 36
F0L0173m
41
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Storing the driver’s seat positions
The system allows to store and recall
(only with ignition key at ON) three dif-
ferent driver’s seat and door mirror po-
sitions.
Proceed as follows:
adjust the driver’s seat and door mir-
ror positions;
press for about 3 seconds one of the
buttons D (“1” , “2” or “3”), corre-
sponding to each of the stored posi-
tions until hearing the confirmation
beep.
Storing a new position (seat and mirror)
will automatically clear the one stored
previously using the same button.
IMPORTANT The lumbar adjustment and
the seat warming function are not con-
trolled by the seat position storing system.
Recalling stored positions
Proceed as follows:
turn the ignition key to ON;
press (by pulse) button D (“1” , “2” or
“3”).
The seat will move automatically, only if
the position to be reached is different
from the current one and the car speed is
lower than 10 km/h.
Seat moving is possible within 1 minute af-
ter removing the key from the ignition
switch or within three minutes after open-
ing the doors.
Should engine be started during the re-
calling phase, seat moving will be tem-
porarily stopped.
IMPORTANT Pressing any of the D but-
tons during the recalling stage, causes im-
mediate stop of the function being per-
formed (“antipanic” mode).
Seat warming (where provided)
Use control C to switch seat warming
on/off. Seat warming can be adjusted ac-
cording to four different levels: 0 (off), 1
(min. warming), 2 (average warming), 3
(max. warming).
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 41
42
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
REAR SEATS
Releasing the back rest fig. 37
lift lever A or B to release respectively
the left or the right section of the back
rest and guide it onto the cushion.
fig. 37
F0L0009m
Only make adjustments
when the car is stationary.
WARNING
HEAD RESTRAINTS
FRONT fig. 38
Head restraints are adjustable in height
and they lock automatically in the required
position.
to raise: raise the head restraint until
hearing the locking click.
to lower: press button A and lower
the head restraint.
REAR fig. 39
Rear seats are fitted with three head re-
straints.
To lift out rear head restraints: press at
the same time buttons B set on both sides
and take them out from the seat back.
IMPORTANT Rear seat passengers shall
always set the head restraints in the po-
sition of use.
fig. 38
F0L0010m
fig. 39
F0L0011m
Remember that the head re-
straints should be adjusted
to support the back of your head and
not your neck. Only in this position
do they exert their protective action.
WARNING
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 42
43
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
To optimise head restraint
protective action, adjust the
seat back upright and keep your head
as close as possible to the head re-
straint.
WARNING
STEERING WHEEL
The driver can adjust the steering wheel
position both axially and in height.
Proceed as follows fig. 40
release the lever pushing it forwards
(position 1);
adjust the steering wheel as required;
lock the lever pulling it towards the
steering wheel (position 2).
Any adjustment of the steer-
ing wheel position must be
carried out only with the car station-
ary and the engine turned off.
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to
carry out whatever after-
market operation involving steering
system or steering column modifica-
tions (e.g.: installation of anti-theft
device) that could badly affect per-
formance and safety, cause the lapse
of warranty and also result in non-
compliance of the car with homolo-
gation requirements.
WARNING
fig. 40
F0L0392m
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 43
44
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
fig. 41
F0L0012m
REARVIEW MIRRORS
DRIVING MIRROR fig. 41
The mirror is fitted with a safety device
that causes it to be released in the event
of a violent crash.
It can be moved using the lever A to two
different positions: normal or antiglare.
ELECTRO-CHROMIC DRIVING
MIRROR fig. 42
Certain versions are fitted with automat-
ic antiglare electro-chromic mirror. The
electro-chromic function is turned on/off
by pressing button ON/OFF in the low-
er section of the mirror. When this func-
tion is on, the mirror led will turn on.
When engaging reverse, the mirror will al-
ways set to daylight colouring.
DOOR MIRRORS fig. 43
Electrical adjustment
This operation is only possible with igni-
tion key at ON.
Proceed as follows:
use switch B to select the mirror re-
quired (left or right);
to adjust the mirror move the switch
C in the four directions;
Adjust mirrors with car stationary and
handbrake on. Mirror defrosting starts au-
tomatically when switching the heated
rear window on.
Storing the “parking” position of
the door mirror on the passenger
side
To improve visibility during parking ma-
noeuvres when engaging the reverse gear,
the driver can adjust/move (and store) the
passenger door mirror to a position dif-
ferent from that used during normal run-
ning.
fig. 42
F0L0310m
fig. 43
F0L0386m
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 44
45
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
To store the required mirror position
proceed as follows:
engage reverse with car stopped and
ignition key to ON;
turn selector B (to select the passen-
ger door mirror);
use selector C to adjust the passenger
door mirror as required to obtain best
position for parking manoeuvres;
keep one of the seat storing/recalling
buttons pressed for 3 seconds at least;
Together with the passenger door mirror
“parking” position, also the driver seat and
door mirror positions will be stored.
The sound of a buzzer confirms that the
mirror position has been stored.
Recalling the “parking” position of
the passenger door mirror
To recall automatically the “parking” po-
sition of the passenger door mirror, pro-
ceed as follows:
engage reverse with car stopped and
ignition key to ON;
turn selector B to select the passen-
ger door mirror; the mirror will set
automatically to the previously stored
position.
If no parking position has been stored,
when engaging reverse the passenger door
mirror will slightly lower to aid the dri-
ver during parking.
The mirror will automatically return to its
original position in the following cases:
10 seconds after disengaging reverse;
when the car speed exceeds 10 km/h
in forward gear ;
when turning selector B to neutral po-
sition or to driver mirror position.
IMPORTANT “Parking” position can on-
ly be stored or recalled with ignition key
at ON.
Automatic door mirror
realignment
Each time the ignition key is turned to
ON, door mirrors return automatically to
the last position set and/or recalled at last
removal of the electronic key.
This enables mirror alignment if when
leaving the car parked one of the door
mirrors has been moved manually and/or
accidentally.
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 45
46
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Manual folding fig. 44
When required (for example when the
mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)
it is possible to fold the mirrors moving
it from position A to position B.
fig. 44
F0L0015m
fig. 45
F0L0387m
Powered folding
(where provided) fig. 45
When required (for example when the
mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)
it is possible to fold the mirrors by press-
ing button C.
To reset mirrors to driving position, press
button C again.
When driving the mirrors
shall always be in position A.
WARNING
As the driver’s door mirror is
curved, it slightly alters the
perception of distance.
WARNING
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 46
47
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
HEATING/CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
1 Fixed side vents - 2 Adjustable side outlets - 3 Fixed upper vent - 4 Fixed central vent - 5 Central swivel vents - 6 Lower vents -
7 Lower vents for rear seats - 8 Adjustable vents for rear seats.
F0L0359m
fig. 46
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 47
48
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
fig. 47
F0L0015m
fig. 48
F0L0311m
fig. 49
F0L0311m
CENTRAL VENTS fig. 47
A = Air flow adjusting control
= completely closed
O = completely open
B = Control for directing air flow.
SIDE VENTS fig. 48
C = Air flow adjusting control
= completely closed
O = completely open
D = Control for directing air flow.
REAR VENTS fig. 49
E = Air flow adjusting control
= completely closed
O = completely open
F = Control for directing air flow.
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 48
49
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
MANUAL CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTROLS fig. 50
A: air distribution knob;
B: compressor on/off button;
C: air temperature knob (mixing warm
and cold air);
D: MAX-DEF function button (front
window fast defrosting/demisting);
E: air flow control knob;
F: heated rear window on/off button;
G: air recirculation on/off button.
F0L0153m
CLIMATIC COMFORT
Knob A directs the air inside the passen-
ger compartment according to five levels:
M
to warm the feet and keep the face
cool (“bilevel” function);
O
air flow from central vents and side
outlets;
y
to demist and defrost the windscreen
and side front windows;
to warm the passenger compartment
and at the same time demist the wind-
screen;
N
to speed up passenger compartment
warming.
fig. 50
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 49
50
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
WARMING THE PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
Proceed as follows:
turn knob C (pointer on red sector)
completely to the right;
turn knob E to the required speed;
move knob A to:
to warm the feet and at the same
time demist the windscreen;
M
to warm the feet and convey cooler
air from central vents and dashboard
outlets;
N
for quick warming.
QUICK WARMING
Proceed as follows:
close all dashboard vents;
turn knob C to red sector;
press button G;
turn knob E to the required fan speed;
turn knob A to
N
.
WINDSCREEN AND FRONT
SIDE WINDOW FAST
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING
(MAX-DEF function)
Proceed as follows:
turn knob C (pointer on red sector)
completely to the right;
turn the MAX-DEF function on by
pressing button D (button led on);
Pressing this button will automatically acti-
vate the following functions:
air distribution to windscreen and side
vents;
fan activation at max. speed;
compressor activation (button led on);
automatic air recirculation (button led
off if previously on);
After demisting/defrosting, press button
D to turn the MAX-DEF function off.
Use common control buttons to restore
the required comfort.
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 50
51
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Window demisting
In the event of considerable outside mois-
ture and/or rain and/or considerable dif-
ferences in temperature inside and out-
side the passenger compartment, perform
the following preventive demisting proce-
dure:
turn air recirculation off by pressing
button G (button led off);
turn knob C to red sector;
turn knob E to 2;
turn knob A to
y
, or to
the win-
dows do not demist.
IMPORTANT Climate control system is
very useful to speed up window demist-
ing: therefore, just perform demisting as
previously described and turn the climate
control system on by pressing button B.
HEATED REAR WINDOW AND
DOOR MIRROR DEMISTING/
DEFROSTING
Press button F to start this function.
This function is timed and switches off au-
tomatically after 30 minutes. To cut out
this function press again button
O
.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on
the inside of the rear window over the
heating filaments to avoid damage that
might cause it to stop working properly.
FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT
To ventilate the passenger’s compartment
properly, proceed as follows:
open completely central vents and side
outlets;
turn knob C to the blue sector;
turn knob E to the required speed;
turn air recirculation off by pressing
button G (button led off);
turn knob A to
O
.
RECIRCULATION
Turn this function on by pressing button
G (button led on).
This function is particularly useful when
the outside air is heavily polluted (in a traf-
fic jam, tunnel, etc.). However, it is bet-
ter not to use it for long periods, espe-
cially if there are several people in the car
to prevent window misting.
IMPORTANT The inside air recirculation
system makes it possible to reach the re-
quired “heating” or “cooling” conditions
faster. Do not use the air recirculation
function on rainy/cold days as it would
considerably increase the possibility of the
windows misting inside.
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 51
52
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
CLIMATE CONTROL (cooling)
Proceed as follows:
turn knob C to the blue sector;
turn knob E to the required speed;
turn knob A to
O
;
turn air recirculation on by pressing
button G (button led on);
press button B to turn climate control
compressor on.
Cooling adjustment
Proceed as follows:
turn air recirculation off by pressing
button G (button led off);
turn knob C to the right to raise tem-
perature;
turn knob E to the left to reduce the
fan speed.
LOOKING AFTER THE SYSTEM
During winter, the climate control system
must be turned on at least once a month
for about 10 minutes. Before summer,
have the system checked at a Fiat Deal-
ership.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
(where provided)
GENERAL
The car is fitted with a two-zone climate
control system which makes it possible to
separately adjust the air temperature on
the driver’s side and on the passenger’s
side. Temperature control is based on the
“equivalent temperature” logic, i.e.: the
system continuously works to keep con-
stant the comfort inside the passenger
compartment and to compensate any vari-
ation of the outside climate conditions, in-
cluding sunshine detected by a proper sen-
sor provided for the purpose.
The system is also fitted with AQS (Air
Quality System) sensor that turns on air
recirculation automatically when it detects
the presence of outside polluted air (for
example when driving in the city, queues
and tunnels).
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 52
53
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
The climate control system automatically
controls and adjusts the following para-
meters and functions:
air temperature at driver/front pas-
senger/rear passenger vents;
air distribution at driver/front passen-
ger vents;
fan speed (continuous air flow varia-
tion);
compressor activation (to cool/dehu-
midify air);
air recirculation.
All the above functions can be changed
manually by selecting the required func-
tion/s and by changing the set parameters.
In this way the automatic control is de-
activated; the system will resume auto-
matic control only for safety reasons (e.g.
risk of window misting up).
Manual selections prevail over automatic
ones and remain in storage until the user
decides to resume automatic control by
pressing the proper button, except when
the system cuts in for particular safety
conditions.
The control of functions not changed man-
ually remains automatic.
The amount of air admitted to the pas-
senger compartment does not depend on
the car speed, since it is electronically con-
trolled by the fan.
The temperature of the air admitted to
the passenger compartment is always con-
trolled automatically according to the tem-
peratures set on the driver’s and front
passenger’s display (except when the sys-
tem is off or under certain conditions
when the compressor is off).
The following parameters and functions
can be set or changed manually:
air temperatures on driver/front pas-
senger side;
fan speed (continuous variation);
air distribution on seven levels (dri-
ver/front passenger side);
climate control compressor on/off;
monozone/two-zone distribution pri-
ority;
fast demisting/defrosting;
air recirculation;
rear heated window.
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 53
54
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SWITCHING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM ON
The system can be started in different
ways, but it is advisable to press one of the
AUTO buttons and then to turn the
knobs to set the temperatures required
on the display.
Since the system controls two zone of the
passenger’s compartment, the driver and
the front passenger can select different
temperatures.
This way the system will start working
completely automatically to reach the
comfort temperatures as quickly as pos-
sible. The system will set air temperature,
quantity and distribution and it will con-
trol the air recirculation function and the
activation of conditioner compressor.
F0L0380m
fig. 51
CONTROLS
A: air recirculation and AQS function
on/off button
B: air distribution button on driver side
C: button for selecting the system auto-
matic mode AUTO on driver side
D: display showing climate control system
data
E: button for selecting the system auto-
matic mode AUTO on passenger side
F: air distribution button on passenger
side
G: knob for adjusting temperature on
passenger side
H: rear window heating on/off button
I: button for activating the MONO
function (alignment of set tempera-
tures)
L: climate control compressor on/off
button
M/N: buttons for adjusting fan speed
O: MAX-DEF function button (front
window fast defrosting/demisting
P: knob for adjusting temperature on dri-
ver side
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 54
55
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
During fully automatic operation, the on-
ly manual settings required are the fol-
lowing:
MONO, to align the air temperature
and distribution set on the passenger’s
side (front or rear) with that on the
driver’s side;
ï, air recirculation, to keep it always
on or off;
-, to speed up demisting/defrosting
of windscreen, front side windows,
rear window and door mirrors;
(, to demist/defrost heated rear win-
dow and door mirrors.
During full automatic system operation,
you can change at any time set tempera-
tures, air distribution and fan speed by us-
ing the relevant buttons or knobs: the sys-
tem will automatically change its settings
to adjust to the new requirements. Dur-
ing FULL AUTO operation, changing air
distribution and/or flow and/or compres-
sor activation and/or air recirculation will
make the FULL wording disappear. In this
way functions will pass from automatic
control to manual control until pressing
again the AUTO button. Fan speed is the
same for every area of the passenger com-
partment.
With one or more functions engaged man-
ually, the adjustment of the temperature
of the air admitted to the passenger com-
partment continues to be controlled au-
tomatically by the system, except with the
climate control compressor off: under this
condition in fact, the temperature of the
air admitted to the passenger compart-
ment cannot be lower than outside air
temperature.
CONTROLS
Air temperature adjusting
knobs P-G
Turning the knobs clockwise or counter-
clockwise, respectively highers or lowers
the temperature of the air required re-
spectively in the front left zone (knob P)
or in the right zone (knob G) of the pas-
senger compartment.
Since the system controls two zones of
the passenger compartment, it is possi-
ble to personalise required temperatures
(driver and passenger).
The temperatures set are shown on the
displays near the relevant knobs.
Pressing button I (MONO ) automatical-
ly aligns the temperature on the passen-
ger’s side with that on the driver’s side;
you can therefore set the same tempera-
ture for both zones by turning knob P on
driver side.
Separate operation of air temperatures
and distribution is restored by turning
knobs or pressing again button I
(MONO) when the button led is on.
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 55
56
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Turning the knobs fully clockwise or
counter-clockwise until they reach the ex-
treme selections HI or LO, the maximum
heating or cooling functions are respec-
tively engaged:
HI function (highest heating power):
this is turned on by rotating the temper-
ature knob clockwise and passing the max.
temperature value (32°C). It can be acti-
vated independently from driver or front
passenger side or both (also when the
MONO function is selected).
When this function is on, the display
shows HI.
This function can be engaged when re-
quiring to heat the passenger compart-
ment as quickly as possible, exploiting the
maximum potential of the system. This
function uses the maximum temperature
of the coolant fluid, while air distribution
and fan speed are controlled according to
the system settings.
More particularly, max. fan speed will not
be immediately engaged if coolant is not
hot enough; this to prevent admitting air
that is not warm enough to the passenger
compartment.
All manual settings are possible with this
function on.
To switch the function off, simply turn the
knob counter-clockwise and set the re-
quired temperature.
LO function (highest cooling power):
this is turned on by rotating the temper-
ature knob counter-clockwise and passing
the min. temperature value (16°C). It can
be activated independently from driver or
front passenger side or both (also when
the MONO function is selected).
When this function is on, the display
shows LO.
This function can be engaged when re-
quiring to cool the passenger compart-
ment as quickly as possible, exploiting the
maximum potential of the system. This
function activates automatically:
MONO function;
air distribution at central / side vents
(shown by the relevant symbol on the
display);
fan at max. speed;
climate control compressor.
All manual settings are possible with this
function on.
To switch the function off, simply turn the
knob clockwise and set the required tem-
perature.
Front air distribution buttons B-F
Pressing these buttons it is possible to
choose manually one of the seven possi-
ble air distributions to the passenger com-
partment (right or left side):
Air flow to the windscreen and front
side window vents to demist or de-
frost them.
˙
Air flow at central and side dash-
board vents to ventilate the chest
and the face during the hot season.
Air flow towards the front and rear
lower parts of the passenger com-
partment. Due to the natural ten-
dency of heat to spread upwards,
this type of distribution allows heat-
ing of the passenger compartment
in the shortest time, also giving a
prompt feeling of warmth.
˙
Splitting of the air flow between the
vents to the lower part of the pas-
senger compartment (warmest air)
and the dashboard centre and side
outlets (coolest air). This air flow
distribution is particularly useful in
spring and autumn when the sun is
shining.
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 56
57
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Splitting of the air flow between the
windscreen and side window
demisting/defrosting vents and the
lower part of the passenger com-
partment. This type of air distrib-
ution allows satisfactory heating of
the passenger compartment while
preventing possible misting of the
windows.
˙
Combined splitting of the air flow
between the windscreen vents,
central/side outlets and vents at
the lower part of the passenger
compartment (feet area). This air
flow distribution enables to keep
good overall comfort conditions in
summer.
Splitting of the air flow between
˙
the windscreen vents, central/side
outlets on the dashboard. This air
flow distribution enables to obtain
satisfactory cooling of the passen-
ger’s compartment and to keep the
required coolig condition in sum-
mer.
Air distribution is selected through but-
tons B and F in “rolling” mode, according
to the sequence shown in the following di-
agram fig. 52.
The type of air distribution selected is
shown by lighting up of the relevant sym-
bols on the display.
To restore automatic air distribution con-
trol after a manual selection, press button
AUTO.
F0L0234m
In FULL AUTO mode, pressing the dis-
tribution buttons B or F for the first time,
will display the current status selected by
the system. It is then possible to select in
“rolling” mode the type of distribution re-
quired by pressing buttons B or F again.
When the driver selects air distribution
to the windscreen, also the air distribu-
tion on passenger side will be distributed
to the windscreen. The passenger can
however select the required air distribu-
tion by pressing the relevant buttons.
fig. 52
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 57
58
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Fan speed adjusting buttons M/N
Press buttons
p+ or pto increase or
to decrease the fan speed and therefore
the amount of air admitted into the pas-
senger compartment.
The fan speed is shown by the lit bars on
the display
max fan speed = all bars lit
min fan speed = one bar lit.
The fan can be cut off only if the cli-
mate control compressor has been
switched off pressing button B.
IMPORTANT To restore automatic
fan speed control after a manual ad-
justment, press button AUTO.
Pressing again button p after min fan
speed will turn the system off.
The display will show OFF and the air re-
circulation condition fig. 53.
AUTO buttons
(automatic operation) C-E
Pressing the AUTO button (on driver
and/or front passenger side) the system
automatically adjusts the amount and dis-
tribution of the air admitted to the pas-
senger compartment, cancelling all the
previous manual adjustments.
This condition is indicated by the message
FULL AUTO on the front system dis-
play.
Manual operation of at least one automatic
function (air recirculation, air distribution,
fan speed or climate control compressor
off) will cause FULL message going off the
display. This means that automatic control
is not complete (except temperature con-
trol which is always automatic).
IMPORTANT Should the system (after
manual settings) be no longer able to guar-
antee the required temperature set in the
passenger compartment, the set tempera-
ture value will start flashing to indicate this
condition, after one minute the AUTO
message will turn off.
To restore system automatic control at
any time, after one or more manual ad-
justments, press button AUTO.
MONO button
(to align set temperatures
and air distribution) I
Pressing button MONO automatically
aligns the temperature on the passenger
side with that on the driver side, it is there-
fore possible to set the same temperature
and air distribution between the two zones
by turning the knob on driver side. This
function is provided to simplify tempera-
ture adjustment of the whole passenger
compartment when only the driver is on-
board. Separate operation of set temper-
ature and air distribution is restored by
turning knob P or G (to set temperature
on front passenger side) or by pressing
again button MONO, when the wording
is shown on the display.
fig. 53
F0L0235m
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 58
59
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Air recirculation and AQS function
on/off button A
If the AQS sensor is not fitted, air recir-
culation works according to the following
operating logics:
forced switching on (inside air recir-
culation always on), indicated by sym-
bol í on the display;
forced switching off (air recirculation
always off with air inlet from the out-
side), indicated by symbol
êon the
display.
The above operating conditions are ob-
tained by pressing in sequence the air re-
circulation button A.
Due to safety reasons, after long recircu-
lation activation (over 25 minutes), the
system will deactivate automatically air re-
circulation for 60 seconds to enable out-
side air inlet.
IMPORTANT The inside air recirculation
system makes it possible to reach the re-
quired heating or cooling conditions faster.
It is however inadvisable to use it on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably in-
crease the possibility of the windows mist-
ing inside, especially if the climate control
system is off.
When outside temperature is below 3°C,
recirculation is forced to off (outside air
inlet) to prevent window misting up.
It will be reactivated automatically if out-
side temperature becomes higher than 5
°C.
The AQS sensor (Air Quality System) in
addition to the above operating logics, en-
ables to control recirculation automati-
cally according to the quality of outside air:
automatic control indicated by symbol
on the display.
In this event the display will show symbol
ïor ñaccording to actual recircu-
lation operating conditions (on or off).
In automatic operation with AQS, inside
air recirculation is turned on automatical-
ly when the antipollution sensor detects
the presence of polluted air, for example
when driving in the city, queues and tun-
nels.
With compressor on, in order to prevent
polluted air (exhaust gas) inlet at stops, the
system will stop air recirculation when the
car speed falls below 6 km/h. As the car
speed increases (over 25 km/h), the sys-
tem will restore the previous automatic
operating conditions.
In automatic operation, AQS is deacti-
vated when outside temperature is below
3°C, the system will activate air recircu-
lation (indicated by symbol on the
display). The user can however set it man-
ually by operating in rolling mode the reir-
culation button: pressing the button for
the first time will display the current re-
circulation condition, indicated by symbol
ê.
It will be reactivated automatically if out-
side temperature becomes higher than 5
°C.
Press the button again to select the re-
quired recirculation condition, indicated
by the corresponding symbol on the dis-
play. Under these conditions manual ac-
tivation of the AQS function could cause
window misting up.
When air recirculation is set manually,
wording FULL will turn off and A will dis-
appear from the recirculation symbol on
the display.
It is inadvisable to use the in-
side air recirculation func-
tion with low outside temperature as
windows may mist over quickly.
WARNING
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 59
60
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Climate control compressor on/off
button L
Pressing button
when the symbol is dis-
played will deactivate the climate control
system compressor. Pressing the button
when the symbol is not displayed will re-
sume automatic control of compressor ac-
tivation; this condition is indicated by the
relevant symbol on the display.
When turning the compressor off, the sys-
tem will deactivate air recirculation to pre-
vent window misting up. Although the sys-
tem is able to keep the required temper-
ature, the wording FULL will disappear
from the display. If the system is no longer
able to keep the required temperature,
temperature value will flash and the word-
ing AUTO will disappear from the display.
IMPORTANT With the climate control
compressor off, it is not possible to admit
air to the passenger compartment with a
temperature below the outside tempera-
ture; moreover, under certain environ-
mental conditions, windows could mist up
fastly since air is not dehumidified.
The switching off of the climate control
compressor remains in storage even when
the engine has been stopped.
To restore automatic control for switch-
ing on the climate control compressor,
press again button
or press button AU-
TO.
With climate control compressor off if
outside temperature is higher than the set
one the system will not be able to keep
the required condition, the temperature
value will then start to flash on the display
for a few seconds and wording AUTO
will then go off.
With climate control compressor off, the
fan speed can be set to zero manually.
With compressor on and engine running,
the fan speed cannot be lower that one
bar on the display.
Compressor will be disabled automatical-
ly with outside temperature below – 1°C.
Under this condition symbol
on the dis-
play will flash for 10 seconds and then go
off.
It will be re-enabled automatically with
outside temperature higher than + 1°C.
Fast window demisting/defrosting
button O
Press this button: the climate control sys-
tem will automatically switch on all the
functions required for fast windscreen and
front side window demisting/defrosting,
that is:
switches on climate control compres-
sor when climatic conditions are suit-
able;
air recirculation off;
maximum air temperature (HI) on
both areas;
activates proper fan speed according
to engine coolant temperature to lim-
it the flow into the passenger com-
partment of air not warm enough to
demist the windows;
directs air flow to windscreen and
front side windows vents;
turns heated rear window on.
IMPORTANT Fast demisting/defrosting
function stays on for about 3 minutes,
since engine coolant temperature exceeds
50°C.
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 60
61
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
When the max. demisting/defrosting func-
tion is on, the button led and the heated
rear window button led are on. FULL
AUTO wording on the display is off.
When the max. demisting/defrosting func-
tion is on, the only manual operations pos-
sible are manual adjustment of the fan
speed and switching heated rear window
off.
With max. demisting/defrosting function
on, the fan works according to the previ-
ously set air distribution in order to guar-
antee top climatic comfort under what-
ever condition.
Pressing the max. demisting/defrosting
button or the air distribution buttons or
operating the temperature knobs, the sys-
tem switches off the max. demisting/de-
frosting function and restores the operat-
ing conditions of the system prior to func-
tion activation.
Heated rear window and door
mirror demisting/defrosting
button H
Press this button to activate heated rear
window demisting/defrosting. When this
function is on, the button led is on.
This function is timed and switches off au-
tomatically after about 20 minutes or by
pressing again the button or by turning the
engine off. It will not be switched on au-
tomatically when restarting the engine.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on
the inside of the rear window over the
heating filaments to avoid damage that
might cause it to stop working properly.
ADDITIONAL HEATER
(Multijet versions)
This device enables quick warming up of
the passenger’s compartment in cold en-
vironmental conditions.
The additional heater will switch on au-
tomatically after turning the ignition key
to ON.
IMPORTANT The additional heater
works only with outside temperature be-
low 12°C, engine coolant temperature be-
low 50°C and car battery voltage over
10.25 V.
IMPORTANT Do not park the car over
flammable material such as paper, dry
grass or leaves: fire danger.
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 61
62
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
EXTERNAL LIGHTS
The left-hand stalk controls the external
lights and the direction indicators.
The external lights can only be switched
on when the ignition key is at ON.
LIGHTS SWITCHED OFF fig. 54
Knurled ring at
å.
SIDELIGHTS fig. 55
Turn the knurled ring to
6.
The warning light 3 on the instrument
panel will turn on.
DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS
fig. 56
Turn the knurled ring to
2.
The warning light 3 on the instrument
panel will turn on.
fig. 54
F0L0021m
fig. 55
F0L0022m
fig. 56
F0L0023m
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 57
When the knurled ring is at
2, pull the
lever towards the steering wheel (2nd un-
stable position).
The warning light 1 on the instrument
panel will turn on.
To turn the main beams off, pull again the
lever towards the steering wheel (dipped
beams will turn on again).
fig. 57
F0L0024m
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 62
63
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
FLASHING THE HEADLIGHTS
fig. 58
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel
(1st unstable position) regardless of the
position of the knurled ring. The warning
light 1 on the instrument panel will turn
on.
DIRECTION INDICATORS fig. 59
Push the lever to (stable) position:
up (position 1): to turn the right-hand
direction indicator on;
down (position 2): to turn the left-
hand direction indicator on.
Warning light
F or D will come on flash-
ing on the instrument panel.
Indicators are switched off automatically
when the steering wheel is straightened.
fig. 58
F0L0025m
fig. 59
F0L0026m
“Lane change” function
If you want the indicator to flash briefly to
show that you are about to change lane,
move the left stalk to unstable position for
less than one second. The direction indi-
cator of the side selected will flash 3 times
and then it will turn off automatically.
“Cornering lights”
(where provided)
With low beams on at a speed of less than
40 km/h, when the steering wheel is
turned through a large angle or upon ac-
tivation of the direction indicator, a light
(incorporated in the fog lamp) will come
on to expand the angle of night-time visi-
bility on the side to which the vehicle is
turned.
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 63
64
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
“FOLLOW ME HOME” DEVICE
This function allows the illumination of the
space in front of the car for a preset pe-
riod of time.
Activation fig. 60
With the ignition key at OFF or removed,
pull the stalk towards the steering wheel
and operate it within 2 minutes from when
the engine is turned off.
At each single movement of the stalk, the
staying on of the lights is extended by 30
seconds up to a maximum of 210 seconds;
then the lights are switched off automati-
cally.
Each time the stalk is operated, the 3
warning light turns on together with the
message on the display (see section
“Warning lights and messages”). The
warning light will come on the first time
the stalk is operated and it will stay on un-
til the function is automatically deactivat-
ed. Each single movement of the stalk will
only extend the staying on of the lights.
Deactivation
Keep the stalk pulled towards the steer-
ing wheel for more than 2 seconds.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
SENSOR (daylight sensor)
(where provided)
It detects the changes of the external light
intensity of the car according to the light
sensitivity set: the greater the sensitivity
is, the smaller the amount of external light
necessary to control the switching-on of
the external headlights will be. The day-
light sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by
the “Set-up menu” of the display.
fig. 60
F0L0027m
F0L1150i
Activation fig. 61
Turn the knurled ring to
2
A
: in this way,
the automatic activation of the side/tail-
lights and dipped beam headlights is si-
multaneously enabled according to the ex-
ternal luminosity.
Deactivation
As a result of the sensor control, the
dipped beam headlights will switch off and,
after about 10 seconds, sidelights will
switch off too.
The sensor is not able to detect the fog
presence, lights shall therefore be
switched on manually.
fig. 61
F0L0028m
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 64
Never use the window wiper
to remove ice or snow from
the windscreen. In these con-
ditions, the wiper is submitted
to excessive effort that results in mo-
tor protection cutting in and wiper op-
eration inhibition for few seconds as a
consequence. If operation is not re-
stored contact Fiat Dealership.
65
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
WINDOW WASHING
WINDSCREEN WASHER/
WIPER
This device can only work when the igni-
tion key is at ON.
The right stalk can be moved to five dif-
ferent positions fig. 62:
A: windscreen wiper off
B: flick wipe.
With the stalk in position B, turning the
knurled ring F four possible intermittent
speeds are obtained:
, = very slow intermittent
— = slow intermittent
—- = intermittent medium
—— = fast intermittent
C: continuous slow;
D: continuous fast;
E: fast temporary (unstable position).
Operation in position E is limited to the
time the stalk is held in this position.
When the lever is released, it returns to
position A automatically stopping the
wiper.
IMPORTANT Replace wiper blades as
specified in section “Car maintenance”.
fig. 62
F0L0030m
“Smart washing” function
Pulling the stalk towards the steering
wheel (unstable position) operates the
windscreen washer fig. 63.
Keeping the stalk pulled for more than half
a second, with just one movement it is
possible to operate the washer jet and the
wiper at the same time.
The wiper stops working four strokes af-
ter releasing the stalk.
A further stroke after five seconds com-
pletes the wiping operation.
fig. 63
F0L0031m
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 65
66
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
RAIN SENSOR (where provided)
The rain sensor is located behind the dri-
ving mirror in contact with the windscreen
and has the purpose of automatically ad-
just, during the intermittent operation, the
frequency of the windscreen wiper
strokes as to the rain intensity.
IMPORTANT Keep clean the glass in the
sensor area.
Activation fig. 64
Move the right-hand stalk downwards by
one position (B).
The activation of the rain sensor is sig-
nalled by a control acquisition “stroke”.
Turning the knurled ring F it is possible to
increase the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
The increase of the sensitivity of the rain
sensor is signalled by a control and acqui-
sition “cycle”.
Operating the windscreen washer with
the rain sensor activated the normal wash-
ing cycle is performed at the end of which
the rain sensor resumes its normal auto-
matic function.
Deactivation fig. 64
Move the stalk off B or turn the ignition
key to OFF.
At next engine starting (key at ON), the
sensor will not be reactivated even if the
stalk is at B. In this event, to activate the
rain sensor you have to move the stalk
to A or C and then again to B or turn the
knurled ring.
Rain sensor activation will be indicated by
at least one wiper “stroke” even if the
windscreen is dry.
The rain sensor is able to recognize and
automatically adjust itself in the presence
of the following particular conditions:
impurities on the controlled surface
(salt, dirt, etc.);
difference between day and night.
fig. 64
F0L0030m
Streaks of water may cause
unrequired blade moving.
WARNING
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 66
Never use the rear window
wiper to remove ice or snow
from the rear window. In
these conditions, the wiper is
submitted to excessive effort that re-
sults in motor protection cutting in and
wiper operation inhibition for few sec-
onds as a consequence. If operation is
not restored contact Fiat Dealership.
67
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
REAR WINDOW WASHER/
WIPER
Operation is only obtained with ignition
key at ON.
Turning the knurled ring A from
å to
'
will operate the rear window wiper as fol-
lows:
intermittent operation if the wind-
screen wiper is off;
synchronised with the windscreen
wiper (but with half stroke frequency).
With windscreen wiper on and reverse
gear engaged, rear window wiping will be
continuous.
Pushing the stalk towards the dashboard
(unstable position) will activate the rear
window washer.
Keeping the stalk pushed for over half a
second will activate also the rear window
wiper.
Releasing the stalk will activate the smart
washing function as described for the
windscreen wiper.
HEADLIGHT WASHER
(where provided)
Headlight washers are “retractable”, i.e.:
they are located inside the front bumpers
and they are activated when (with dipped
beams on) the windscreen washer is op-
erated.
IMPORTANT Check at regular intervals
correct operation and cleanness of noz-
zles.
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 67
68
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
CRUISE CONTROL
(where provided)
It is a device able to support the driver,
with electronic control, which allows dri-
ving at speed over 30 km/h on long and
straight dry roads (e.g.: motorways), at a
desired speed, without pressing the ac-
celerator pedal. Therefore it is not sug-
gested to use this device on extra-urban
roads with traffic. Do not use it in town.
DEVICE ENGAGEMENT fig. 65
Turn knurled ring A to ON.
The Cruise Control cannot be engaged
in first or reverse gear. It is advisable to
engage it in 4
th
or higher gears.
Travelling downhill with the device en-
gaged, the car speed may increase more
than the memorised one.
When the device is activated the warn-
ing light
Ü
turns on together with the rel-
evant message on the instrument panel.
TO MEMORISE SPEED
Proceed as follows:
turn the knurled ring A to ON and
press the accelerator pedal to the re-
quired speed;
move the stalk upwards (+) for at least
one second, then release it. The car
speed is memorised and it is therefore
possible to release the accelerator
pedal.
In the case of need (when overtaking for
instance) acceleration is possible simply
pressing the accelerator pedal: releasing
the accelerator pedal, the car will return
to the speed memorised previously.
TO RESET THE MEMORISED
SPEED
If the device has been disengaged for ex-
ample pressing the brake or clutch pedal,
the memorised speed can be reset as fol-
lows:
accelerate gradually until reaching a
speed approaching the one memo-
rised;
engage the gear selected at the time of
speed memorising;
press the RES B button.
fig. 65
F0L0033m
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 68
69
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
TO INCREASE THE MEMORISED
SPEED
The speed memorised can be increased in
two ways:
pressing the accelerator and then
memorising the new speed reached;
or
moving the stalk upwards (+).
Each operation of the stalk will corre-
spond to a slight increase in speed (about
1 km/h), while keeping the stalk upwards
will correspond to a continuous speed in-
crease.
TO REDUCE MEMORISED
SPEED
The speed memorised can be increased in
two ways:
disengaging the device and then mem-
orising the new speed;
or
moving the stalk downwards () until
reaching the new speed which will be
memorised automatically.
Each operation of the stalk will corre-
spond to a slight reduction in speed (about
1 km/h), while keeping the stalk down-
wards will correspond to a continuous
speed reduction.
DEVICE DISENGAGEMENT
The device can be disengaged in the fol-
lowing ways:
turning the knurled ring A to OFF;
turning the engine off;
pressing the brake pedal or engaging
the hand brake;
pressing the clutch pedal;
shifting gear with automatic transmis-
sion in sequential mode;
with car speed below the preset lim-
it;
pressing the accelerator pedal; in this
case the system is not really disen-
gaged but the request for acceleration
takes priority over the system. The
cruise control is however active and it
will not be necessary to press button
RES to resume previous conditions
after ending acceleration.
The device is automatically deactivated in
one of the following cases:
ABS or ESP system cut-in;
system failure.
When travelling with the de-
vice on, never set the
gearshift lever to neutral.
WARNING
In the event of device mal-
function or failure, turn the
knurled ring A to OFF and contact a
Fiat Dealership after checking the
protection fuse integrity.
WARNING
039-069 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:15 Pagina 69
70
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
CEILING LIGHTS
FRONT CEILING LIGHTS fig. 66
Courtesy lights
Press the lens on point A to turn on/off
the driver’s courtesy light or press the lens
on point C to turn on/off the passenger’s
courtesy light.
With ignition key at OFF or removed, the
ceiling light will stay on for about 15 min-
utes, then it is automatically switched off.
Central light
It turns on automatically when opening a
door and it will turn off when closing the
door, about 10 seconds later.
If the door is left open, the light goes off
after about 3 minutes.
Central light can also be turned on/off by
pressing the lens on point B; rear side
lights will turn on at the same time.
Light turning on/off is gradual.
After switching on by button B, if the key
is at OFF or removed, the ceiling light
stays on for about 15 minutes, then it is
automatically switched off.
REAR CEILING LIGHTS fig. 67
To turn these lights on/off, press the lens
on point D.
fig. 66
F0L0105m
fig. 67
F0L0106m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 70
71
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
MANUTENZIONE
E CURA
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
CONTROLS
HAZARD LIGHTS fig. 68
They turn on pressing the button A, re-
gardless of the position of the ignition key.
When the function is active, warning lights
Î
and
¥
on the panel blink.
To switch off, press again the button A.
The use of hazard lights is governed by the
Highway Code of the country you are in.
Keep to the rules.
fig. 68
F0L0034m
fig. 69
F0L0035m
The use of hazard lights is
governed by the Road Traf-
fic Code of the country you are in.
Keep to the rules.
WARNING
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
(where provided) fig. 69
To turn front fog lights on, press button
5
, to activate these lights it is necessary
to have the side/taillights switched on.
Warning light
5
on the instrument pan-
el will turn on.
Press the button again to turn the light off.
Emergency braking
In the event of emergency braking the
emergency lights automatically turn on and
at the same time the lights
Î
end
¥
turn
on on the dashboard.
The function automatically turns off when
the emergency braking stops.
This function complies with the current ap-
plicable laws.
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 71
72
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
REAR FOG LIGHT fig. 70
To turn rear fog light on, press button 4,
to activate this light it is necessary to have
the dipped beams switched on.
Warning light 4 on the instrument panel
will turn on.
Press the button again to turn the light off.
PARKING LIGHTS fig. 71
These lights can only be turned on with ig-
nition key at OFF or removed, by press-
ing button A for about 1 second, warn-
ing light 3 on the instrument panel will
turn on.
With parking lights on, moving the left
stalk upwards (position 1) or downwards
(position 2) will turn on respectively the
right or left sidelights; the warning light will
go off.
Moving the left stalk back to central po-
sition will turn on all side/taillights and al-
so the warning light 3.
Press the button again to turn the lights
off.
POWER SUPPLY AND FUEL
CUT-OFF SWITCH
The car is fitted with a safety switch that
in the event of a crash comes into opera-
tion by cutting off fuel and turning off the
engine as a consequence. Certain versions
are equipped with an additional safety
switch that in the event of a crash comes
into operation by cutting off the power sup-
ply. These two safety switches therefore
prevent dangerous fuel leaks due to fuel line
cracking and sparks or electric discharges
due to damaging or malfunctioning of the
electric components of the car in the event
of a crash.
IMPORTANT After a crash, remember to
remove the key from the ignition device
to prevent battery run-down.
If, after a crash no fuel leaks or damages
to the electric devices (e.g. headlights) are
found and the car can be started again, re-
set the fuel cut-off switch and the power
supply cut-off switch (where provided).
Follow the instructions given below.
fig. 70
F0L0230m
fig. 71
F0L0036m
If, after a crash, you smell fu-
el or see leaks from the fuel
system, do not reset the switches to
avoid fire risk.
WARNING
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 72
73
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Resetting the fuel cut-off switch
fig. 72
To reset the fuel cut-off switch, press but-
ton A.
Resetting the power supply cut-off
switch (where provided) fig. 73-74
The switch is located inside the fuse box
at battery positive terminal.
To reset the power supply cut-off switch,
proceed as follows:
press button A to reset the fuel cut-
off switch;
open the bonnet;
operate the retaining clips B and re-
move the protection cover C;
press button D to reset the power
supply.
fig. 72
F0L0107m
fig. 73
F0L0308m
fig. 74
F0L0307m
Before resetting the power
supply cut-off switch care-
fully inspect the car for fuel leaks or
damages to electric devices (e.g.
headlights).
WARNING
Before resetting the fuel cut-
off switch carefully inspect
the car for fuel leaks or damages to
electric devices (e.g. headlights).
WARNING
Sunroof, sun visor (where
provided) and power window
initialisation
After resetting the safety switches, the
sunroof, sun visor and power window op-
eration shall be re-initialised. For the rel-
evant procedures, refer to paragraphs
“Sunroof” and “Power windows”, in this
section.
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 73
74
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
INTERIOR FITTINGS
FRONT ARMREST WITH
ODDMENT COMPARTMENT
AND REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
Press lever A-fig. 75 to raise the front
armrest and reach a first oddment/mobile
phone compartment.
Lift cover B-fig. 75 to reach a second
compartment that is warmed/cooled by
an air outlet D-fig. 77 connected to the
climate control system.
Note For direct access to the heated/
cooled compartment, lift the arm without
pressing the lever A-fig. 75. Hold it on the
side areas at point C as shown in fig. 75.
Move lever E-fig. 77 as shown by the ar-
row to open the outlet and to make
cool/warm air come into the compart-
ment.
If the two-zone climate control system is
fitted, the temperature of this compart-
ment will be the same as that on passen-
ger side.
When the armrest is fully raised, take care
not to press button A-fig. 75, accidentally
to avoid opening the oddment compart-
ment cover and the falling of the objects
contained as a consequence.
fig. 76
F0L0375m
fig. 75
F0L0527m
fig. 77
F0L0528m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 74
75
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
REAR ARMREST (where provided)
To use the rear armrest A-fig. 78, low-
er it as shown in the figure.
The rear armrest can be fitted (where
provided) with two glass/can holders. To
use them pull tab B-fig. 79 in arrow di-
rection.
Inside the armrest, after lifting the cover,
there is an oddment compartment fig. 80.
GLOVEBOX fig. 81
To open the glovebox move the handle as
shown by the arrow.
When the glovebox is opened, an interi-
or courtesy light comes on.
fig. 78
F0L0037m
fig. 79
F0L0108m
fig. 80
F0L0109m
fig. 81
F0L0038m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 75
76
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
ODDMENT COMPARTMENT
fig. 82
It is located on the central console under
the front armrest.
GLASS/CAN HOLDERS
They are located on the front console.
COINS BOX fig. 82
It is located on the central console, at the
side of the handbrake lever.
EYEGLASSES HOLDER
(where provided) fig. 83
It is located on the roof panel near the
handle on the driver side.
Use it as shown in the figure.
SMOKER’S KIT
One purple chrysanthemum grew up part-
ly drunkenly. The Macintoshes laughed
quite easily. Five silly aardvarks towed the
bourgeois fountain. Five silly dogs tastes
umpteen poisons. The botulisms marries
purple wart hogs, even though five d
The electric socket only works with the
ignition key turned to ON. To use it, open
the protective cover.
CIGAR LIGHTER
(where provided) fig.84
It is located on the central console, at the
side of the handbrake lever.
Press button A to switch on the cigar
lighter with ignition key at ON.
After about 15 seconds the button will re-
turn to its initial position and is ready for
use.
IMPORTANT Always check that the cig-
ar lighter has turned off.
fig. 82
F0L0039m
fig. 83
F0L0053m
fig. 84
F0L0040m
The cigar lighter gets very
hot. Handle it with care and
make sure that it is not used by chil-
dren: danger of fire and/or burns.
WARNING
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 76
77
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
ASHTRAY (where provided)
The central console houses an ashtray,
raise lid A-fig. 85 to use it.
To empty the ashtray, remove the inner
box.
Ashtrays are located on passenger’s door
armrests; to use the ashtray raise the cor-
responding lid, to empty them remove the
inner box B-fig. 86.
SUN VISORS fig. 87
These are positioned to the sides of the
rear-view mirror. They can swing to the
sides and up or down.
On the back of the visor (driver and pas-
senger side) there are two courtesy mir-
rors. The passenger side mirror and on
some versions also the driver side mirror,
are lighted in order to allow their use even
in poor lighting conditions.
Open cover A to use the mirror.
The passenger’s sun visor also carries the
symbols and the message concerning the
correct use of the child restraint system
with passenger’s air bag (for further in-
formation see paragraph “Passenger’s
front Air bag” in section “Safety devices”).
CURRENT OUTLET fig. 88
The current outlet only works with igni-
tion key at ON and it is located beneath
the central air vents for rear seats.
Open protection cover A to use it.
fig. 85
F0L0110m
fig. 86
F0L0111m
fig. 87
F0L0041m
fig. 88
F0L0042m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 77
78
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
REAR ROLLER SUNBLINDS
(where provided) fig. 89
Certain versions can be fitted on rear
doors with roller sunblinds, with reels and
return springs.
Unwind the sunblind using tab A and se-
cure it to the upper catches B.
SUNROOF
(where provided)
The sunroof consists of two wide panes
(a fixed one and a moving one), fitted with
a front powered sun curtain and a rear
manual sun curtain. Sunroof only works
with ignition key at ON. Controls A, B
and C on the central ceiling light shall be
used to open/close the sunroof and the
powered sun curtain.
To open
With fully closed sunroof (knob at 0), turn
knob A-fig. 90 clockwise and select one
of the five possible opening positions.
Every position corresponds to a type of
sunroof opening, e.g.: position 1 corre-
sponds to the narrowest opening (sunroof
almost closed) whereas position 5 corre-
sponds to the widest one (sunroof fully
open).
For wide opening with just one knob op-
eration, set it right to the last position.
To close
Turn knob A-fig. 90 counter-clockwise
and select one of the possible five closing
positions.
Every position corresponds to a type of
sunroof closing. For closing the sunroof
fully with just one operation, set the knob
A-fig. 90 to 0.
fig. 89
F0L0312m
fig. 90
F0L0174m
Do not open the sunroof if
there is snow or ice on it: it
could be damaged.
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 78
79
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Front sun curtain opening/closing
Press button B-fig. 90 to open the sun
curtain fully. Press the button again to stop
it.
To close the sun curtain press button C-
fig. 90. Press the button again to stop it.
Caution: opening the sunroof with the sun
curtain closed will make the sun curtain
open automatically.
Rear sun curtain opening/closing
Rear sun curtain opening/closing is man-
ual.
ANTI-CRUSHING SAFETY
SYSTEM
Sunroof is fitted with anti-crushing safety
system that detects the presence of an ob-
stacle during sunroof closing stroke and
that cuts in by stopping and reversing the
sunroof stroke.
The anti-crushing safety system fitted on
the front curtain outline is active along the
whole closing range of the curtain and cuts
into operation when an obstacle is met.
This safety device guarantees the rever-
sal for a short section.
INITIALISATION PROCEDURE
Sunroof and powered sun curtain shall be
re-initialised after disconnecting the bat-
tery or if the relevant protection fuse is
blown.
Sunroof initialisation
Proceed as follows:
turn the ignition key to ON;
turn knob A-fig. 90 fully counter-
clockwise;
press and keep knob A-fig. 90
pressed until the sunroof locks, then
release it;
within 5 seconds, press and keep knob
A pressed; the sunroof will move au-
tomatically, during this stage keep on
pressing the knob;
initialisation will end when the sunroof
stops.
When leaving the car, the ig-
nition key should be removed
to prevent the sunroof from being op-
erated inadvertently and harming any-
one remaining in the car. Improper use
of the sunroof can be dangerous. Be-
fore and during its operation ensure
that any passengers are not at risk
from the moving roof either by per-
sonal objects getting caught in the
mechanism or by being injured by it di-
rectly.
WARNING
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 79
80
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Sun curtain initialisation
Proceed as follows:
Close the sunroof completely;
turn the ignition key to OFF for 10
seconds;
turn the ignition key to ON;
turn the knob to closing position and
keep it pressed until hearing the me-
chanical lock;
initialisation ended.
ANTI-CRUSHING SYSTEM
INHIBITION
Ice or other foreign matters in the sun-
roof rails could cause anti-crushing re-
peated operation. Therefore make sure
there is no obstacle.
In this case it is possible to inhibit the an-
ti-crushing system by closing the roof
(within 5 seconds from system activation),
turning knob A-fig. 90 to 0 and keeping
it pressed upwards until closing.
EMERGENCY OPERATION
fig. 91-92
If the electrical control device does not
work, the sunroof can be operated man-
ually as follows:
remove the rear ceiling light and take
out the emergency operation wrench,
provided as standard, from the rele-
vant seat;
fit the wrench into slot A-fig. 92 and
turn it clockwise to open the sunroof
and counter-clockwise to close it.
fig. 91
F0L0215m
fig. 92
F0L0216m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 80
81
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
DOORS
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING
SYSTEM
From the outside fig. 93
With the doors closed, press remote con-
trol button
Á or, if the remote control
is malfunctioning, fit and turn the emer-
gency metal insert into the lock of one of
the front doors.
From the inside fig. 94
With the doors closed, press buttons A
or B, set on the central panel to lock or
unlock the doors.
IMPORTANT If one door is not perfect-
ly closed or there is a system failure, cen-
tral door locking will not work and after
a few seconds the device will be exclud-
ed for about 2 minutes. During this time
it is however possible to lock/unlock the
doors manually. The device will be reac-
tivated after 2 minutes.
If the cause of malfunctioning has been re-
moved the device will operate regularly
again.
When the doors are locked, the led C
on button is turned on.
CHILD LOCK fig. 95
To prevent opening the rear doors from
the inside.
This device can be engaged only with
doors open:
position 1 - engaged (door locked);
position 2 - disengaged (door open-
able from inside).
The device stays on even if the doors are
unlocked by the centralised system.
IMPORTANT Always use this device
when transporting children.
IMPORTANT After engaging the lock,
check by trying to open a rear door with
the internal handle.
fig. 93
F0L0100m
fig. 95
F0L0112m
fig. 94
F0L0529m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 81
82
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
POWER WINDOWS
All versions are fitted with power win-
dows with anti-crushing safety device to
detect the presence of an obstacle in the
window closing stroke. If an obstacle is de-
tected, the safety system will stop window
closing and, according to window position,
will also reverse window stroke.
IMPORTANT In the event that the anti-
crushing function is activated 5 times in
only 1 minute, the system will automati-
cally enter the “recovery” mode (self-pro-
tection). This conditions is pointed out by
the fact that, in the closing phase, the win-
dow goes up in jerks.
So, it is necessary to carry out the sys-
tem restore procedure, acting as follows:
open the windows;
or
turn the ignition key to OFF and then
to ON.
The logic is restored if no malfunction is
present, the window returns to its normal
operation automatically; otherwise con-
tact a Fiat Dealership.
IMPORTANT With the ignition key to
OFF or removed, the power windows re-
main activated for about 2 minutes and are
deactivated immediately the moment a
door is opened.
WINDOW SAFETY SYSTEM
INITIALISATION
Safety system shall be re-initialised after
disconnecting the battery or if the rele-
vant protection fuse is blown.
Initialisation procedure:
open completely manually or auto-
matically the window to initialise ;
fully close the window manually (with-
out stops);
after window stopping, keep on press-
ing the closing control for at least 1
second.
fig. 96
F0L0043m
The system conforms to the
forthcoming standard
2000/4/EC concerning the safety of
passengers leaning out of the pas-
senger compartment.
WARNING
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 82
83
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
CONTROLS
Driver side fig. 97
On the driver’s door panel are set the but-
tons for controlling, with ignition key at
ON:
A front left window opening/closing;
window opening or closing in “auto-
matic continuous” mode;
B front right window opening/closing;
window opening or closing in “auto-
matic continuous” mode;
C rear left window opening/closing; “au-
tomatic continuous” mode operation
just during window opening;
Pressing briefly one of the buttons the
window “jerks” whereas a prolonged
pressing makes the window opening or
closing in “automatic continuous” mode.
Pressing the button again will stop the win-
dow in the required position.
Front passenger door and rear
doors fig. 98
Front passenger door armrest and rear
door armrests feature the switches to be
used for controlling the corresponding
window.
fig. 97
F0L0388m
Improper use of the power
windows can be dangerous.
Before and during its operation en-
sure that any passengers are not at
risk from the moving glass either by
personal objects getting caught in the
mechanism or by being injured by it
directly. Always remove the ignition
key when getting out of the car to
prevent the power windows being op-
erated accidentally and constituting
a danger to the passengers in the car.
WARNING
fig. 98
F0L0045m
D rear right window opening/closing;
“automatic continuous” mode opera-
tion just during window opening;
E rear power window enabling/disabling
controls.
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 83
84
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
BOOT
The boot tailgate (when unlocked) can be
opened only from the outside through the
electric opening handle set above the
number plate holder fig. 99.
If doors are unlocked the boot can be
opened at any time.
Using the instrument panel display (see
paragraph “Multifunction display” in this
section) it is possible to activate the op-
tion for independent boot unlocking: in
this way the boot is not unlocked when
unlocking the doors.
IMPORTANT With running car, never op-
erate the tailgate shackle.
In the event of battery failure, after using
the emergency metal insert of the key to
get into the car, it will be possible to open
the boot from the inside by operating
manually the lever set at the bottom on
the right side of the lock, set at the bot-
tom in the middle of the tailgate.
OPENING THE TAILGATE BY
REMOTE CONTROL fig. 100
Press button
R,
even when the alarm
(where provided) is activated.
The tailgate opening is indicated by dou-
ble flashing of direction indicators; closing
is indicated by one flashing (only if alarm
is on).
TAILGATE CLOSING
Lower the tailgate until hearing the lock-
ing click.
IMPORTANT If the option for indepen-
dent boot unlocking is on, before closing
the boot, check whether you have with
you the ignition key since the boot will
be locked automatically.
fig. 99
F0L0046m
fig. 100
F0L0100m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 84
85
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
EXTENDING THE BOOT
Partial extension (1/3 or 2/3)
The boot can be partially (1/3 or 2/3) or
totally extended splitting the rear seat.
To make use of the maximum loading vol-
ume, remove the luggage compartment
cover following the instructions given in
paragraph “Luggage compartment cover”
and lower the loading surface as described
previously.
Proceed as follows:
lower completely the rear seat head
restraints;
check that the seat belt is not twisted;
The addition of objects
(speakers, spoilers, etc.) on the
rear shelf or boot lid, except
those envisaged by the man-
ufacturer, may prevent the gas filled
struts at the sides of the boot from
working properly.
Never travel with objects on
the rear shelf to prevent
them being thrown forwards and in-
juring passengers in case of accident
or sharp braking.
WARNING
When using the boot, make
sure the loads do not exceed
the permitted weight (see section
“Technical specifications”). Also
make sure the items in the boot are
arranged properly to prevent them
being thrown forwards and injuring
passengers should you brake sharply.
WARNING
TAILGATE EMERGENCY
OPENING fig. 101
To open the tailgate from the inside if the
battery is flat or the electric tailgate lock
is failing, proceed as follows (see “Ex-
tending the boot” in tis section):
lower completely the rear head re-
straints;
tilt rear seat cushions;
tilt backrests;
operate lever A inside the boot to
open the tailgate.
fig. 101
F0L0047m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 85
86
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
lift handle A or B-fig. 102 to unlock
respectively the left or right section of
the backrest and then guide the back-
rest onto the cushion.
The boot extension to the right fig. 103
makes it possible to carry two passengers
on the rear seat left-hand side.
The boot extension to the left fig. 104
makes it possible to carry one passenger
on the rear seat right-hand side.
Total extension fig. 105
Tilt the rear seat completely to obtain
maximum boot extension.
To make use of the maximum loading vol-
ume, remove the luggage compartment
cover following the instructions given in
paragraph “Luggage compartment cover”
and lower the loading surface as described
previously.
Proceed as follows:
lower completely the rear seat head
restraints;
check that the seat belt is not twisted;
lift handles A and B-fig. 102 to release
the backrests and guide them onto the
cushion.
fig. 102
F0L0009m
fig. 103
F0L0113m
fig. 104
F0L0114m
fig. 105
F0L0115m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 86
87
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
COVER fig. 106
The luggage compartment cover A can be
rolled up and removed.
To roll it up remove the two rear pins B
from their housings and then guide it dur-
ing rolling up.
Removing the luggage
compartment cover fig. 107
Proceed as follows:
roll it as described previously;
remove the reel unit C by pressing its
sides (direction 1) and raising it (di-
rection 2).
To refit the cover, insert the reel ends in
their housings and make sure the fasten-
ing hooks are well fastened. Now extend
the cover by pulling its handles, as previ-
ously described, and hook the two rear
pins.
IMPORTANT Do not put heavy objects
on the cover which may seriously damage
it.
fig. 106
F0L0117m
fig. 107
F0L0118m
The objects put on the cov-
er may be thrown forwards
and injure passengers should you
brake sharply or in the event of an ac-
cident.
WARNING
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 87
88
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
TO RETURN THE REAR SEAT
BACK TO ITS ORIGINAL
POSITION fig. 108
Raise the seat backrests and push them
back until hearing the locking click of both
retainers.
IMPORTANT Correct backrest fastening
is guaranteed when the “red band” B aside
levers A is no longer visible. The “red
band” actually indicates that the backrest
is not properly secured. When setting the
backrest to travelling position, always
make sure it is properly secured by hear-
ing the locking click.
IMPORTANT After putting the seats back
to their travelling position, restore the
seat belt position to make them ready for
use.
DOUBLE LOADING
COMPARTMENT
(where provided)
In addition to fully or partially folding seats,
the car can also be fitted with a loading
surface to be adjusted at two different
heights in order to make the loading sur-
face flat and to increase or decrease the
boot volume as required.
Keeping the loading surface up it will be
possible to make use of the space obtained
below as additional compartment for frag-
ile or small objects.
fig. 108
F0L0233m
Make sure the backrest is
properly secured at both
sides (red bands B not visible) to pre-
vent it moves forward in the event of
sharp braking causing injuries to pas-
sengers.
WARNING
fig. 109
F0L0142m
fig. 110
F0L0241m
To access the compartment set under-
neath the loading surface, proceed as fol-
lows:
raise handle A-fig. 109 pressing in the
point shown by the arrow at “PUSH”,
lift the loading surface and secure it by
the proper wire to the upper hook on
the roof as shown in the figure
fig. 110.
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 88
89
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Setting the loading surface at
lower level (where provided)
To improve the loading space, lower the
luggage compartment surface fig. 111, as
follows:
raise handle A-fig. 109 pressing in the
point shown by the arrow at “PUSH”,
use the handle to remove the loading
surface from the seat on the suitcase
board by raising it slightly and pulling
it outwards; the knuckle on the seat
side will facilitate this manoeuvre.
To reposition the loading surface to the
upper level proceed as follows:
raise handle A-fig. 109 pressing in the
point shown by the arrow at “PUSH”,
use the handle to raise the loading sur-
face from the boot mat and pull it out-
wards; the knuckle on the seat side
will facilitate this manoeuvre.
ANCHORING THE LOAD
The boot contains the proper hook for
anchoring the required load fig. 113.
fig. 111
F0L0177m
fig. 112
F0L0141m
fig. 113
F0L0138m
Boot loading surface set at
top position can withstand 70
kg max. and 200 kg at bottom
position as shown on the
proper label set under the loading sur-
face (see fig. 112).
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 89
90
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
Certain versions (where provided) are fit-
ted with a luggage retainer net that can be
secured to the fastening rings fig. 114.
IMPORTANT Never anchor to single
hook a load exceeding 100 kg.
Certain versions (where provided) are fit-
ted with a luggage anti-throw out safety
net secured to the roof at two side seats
fig. 115, and at the bottom to the load re-
taining rings set on the wheelhouses.
BONNET
TO OPEN THE BONNET
Proceed as follows:
pull the lever A-fig. 116 in the direc-
tion indicated by the arrow in order
to release the lock of the engine bon-
net;
insert your hand between bonnet and
bumper and push the lever B-fig. 117
to the left as shown;
lift the bonnet and at the same time
release the rod C fig. 118 from the
catch D, then fit the rod end into the
bonnet recess E.
IMPORTANT Before opening the bonnet,
check that windscreen wiper arms are not
lifted from the windscreen.
fig. 114
F0L0237m
fig. 115
F0L0238m
If you want to carry reserve
fuel in a can, follow law reg-
ulations, only using a certified can,
suitably fastened to the load securing
eyelets. Even in this way the risk of
fire is increased in the case of an ac-
cident.
WARNING
A heavy load that has not
been secured may cause se-
rious harm.
WARNING
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 90
91
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
TO CLOSE THE BONNET fig. 118
Proceed as follows:
hold the bonnet up with one hand and
with the other remove rod C from re-
cess E and fit it back into its catch D;
lower the bonnet at approx. 20 cen-
timetres from the engine compart-
ment and then let it drop, ensuring
that it is fully closed and not just held
in position by the safety catch. If the
bonnet does not close properly, do
not push it down but open it again and
repeat the above procedure.
IMPORTANT Always check that the bon-
net is closed properly to avoid its opening
while the car is travelling.
fig. 116
F0L0048m
fig. 118
F0L0116m
For safety reasons the bon-
net must be closed properly
to avoid its opening while the car is
travelling. Therefore, always check it
is properly closed and the catch en-
gaged. Should you notice that the
catch is not perfectly engaged when
travelling, stop the car immediately
and close the bonnet.
WARNING
If the supporting rod is not
positioned correctly the bon-
net may fall violently.
WARNING
Carry out operations only
when the car is stationary.
WARNING
fig. 117
F0L0524m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 91
92
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
ROOF RACK/
SKI RACK
The roof rack/ski rack shall be secured to
the roof at points A-fig. 119.
To mount it, lift the tabs and proceed as
follows:
for versions with sunroof: extract the
tabs using the screwdriver provided
in the kit to reach the fastening seats
fig. 120;
for versions without sunroof: lift the
tabs using the screwdriver provided
in the kit to reach the fastening seats
fig. 121;
A roof rack/ski rack specially designed for
the car is available at Lineaccessori Fiat.
After few kilometres, check that the fas-
tening screws are firmly tightened.
IMPORTANT Never exceed the max.
permissible loads (see section “Technical
specifications”).
The car can be fitted with two longitudi-
nal bars that can be used, by adding spe-
cial accessories to carry various objects
(e.g.: skis, windsurf, etc..).
fig. 119
F0L0222m
fig. 120
F0L0231m
fig. 121
F0L0232m
Open the tailgate with care
when carrying objects on the
roof rack bars to prevent impacts.
WARNING
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 92
93
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
HEADLIGHTS
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT
BEAM
Proper adjustment of the headlight beams
is of vital importance for your safety and
comfort and also for the other road users.
To ensure you and other drivers have the
best visibility conditions when travelling
with the headlights on, the headlights must
be set properly. Contact Fiat Dealership
to have the headlights properly adjusted.
IMPORTANT When turning on (Xenon)
gas discharge headlight lamps (where pro-
vided), it is normal that there should be a
vertical movement of reflectors, and con-
sequently the same will also happen to the
light beam, for the time required to
achieve the correct headlight trim stabili-
sation, equal to approx. 2 seconds.
Headlight aiming device
It works with ignition key at ON and
dipped beams on. When the car is loaded,
it slopes backwards. This means that the
headlight beam rises. In this case, it is nec-
essary to return it to the correct position.
To adjust the headlight slant
fig. 122
Press button A set on the control panel;
if the car is fitted with (Xenon) gas dis-
charge headlights, slant adjustment is elec-
tronic and therefore button A is not pre-
sent.
The display located on the instrument pan-
el, provides the visual indication of the po-
sitions during the adjustment operation
(fig. 123: multifunctional display - fig. 124:
reconfigurable multifunctional display).
Position 0 - one or two people occupy-
ing the front seats.
Position 1 - five people.
Position 2 - five people + load in the boot.
Position 3 - driver + maximum permissi-
ble load stowed in the boot.
IMPORTANT Check beam aiming every
time the load carried changes.
fig. 122
F0L0050m
fig. 123
F0L0051m
fig. 124
F0L0519m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 93
94
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
FRONT FOG LIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
Contact Fiat Dealership to have the head-
lights properly adjusted.
HEADLIGHT BEAM
ADJUSTMENT ABROAD
The dipped beam headlights are adjusted
for circulation in the country in which the
car is marketed. In countries with oppo-
site circulation, to avoid glaring oncom-
ing vehicles, it is necessary to cover the
areas of the headlight using a special stick-
er tape provided for the purpose and avail-
able at Lineaccessori Fiat. Contact Fiat
Dealership.
ABS SYSTEM
The car is fitted with an ABS braking sys-
tem, which prevents the wheels from lock-
ing when braking, makes the most of road
grip and gives the best control when emer-
gency braking under difficulty road condi-
tions.
System is completed by EBD (Electronic
Braking Force Distribution), which dis-
tributes the braking action between front
and rear wheels.
IMPORTANT To have the maximum ef-
ficiency of the braking system, it is neces-
sary a setting period of about 500 km
(with new car after replacing brake
pads/discs): during this period it is better
to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged
brakes.
ESP SYSTEM INTERVENTION
When the ABS cuts in, you will feel the
brake pedal pulsating slightly and the sys-
tem get noisier: it means that the speed
should be altered to fit the type of road sur-
face.
If the ABS system cuts in, it is a sign that
the grip between tyre and the road sur-
face has reached the limit: you must slow
down to match the speed to the road grip
available.
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 94
95
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
FAILURE WARNINGS
ABS failure
ABS failure is indicated by the turning on
of warning light
>
on the instrument pan-
el together with the dedicated message on
the display (see section “Warning lights
and messages”).
In this case the braking system is still effi-
cient, though without the aid of the ABS
system. Drive carefully to the closest Fiat
Dealership to have the system checked.
EBD failure
EBD failure is indicated by the turning on
of warning lights
>
and
x
on the in-
strument panel together with the dedi-
cated message on the display (see section
“Warning lights and messages”).
In this case with sharp braking the rear
wheels might lock too early, with the pos-
sibility of skidding. Drive extremely care-
fully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to have
the system checked.
BRAKE ASSIST
(emergency braking assistance)
(where provided)
The system, which cannot be cut out, rec-
ognizes emergency braking (on the ground
of the brake pedal operation speed) and
considerably increases the pressure in the
brake circuit.
During emergency braking, the emergency
lights turn on automatically; when accel-
erating the lights turn off automatically.
Brake Assist is deactivated on the versions
equipped with ESP, in the event of ESP sys-
tem failure (indicated by warning light
á
switching on together with the message
on the display).
If the ABS system cuts in, it
is a sign that the grip be-
tween tyre and the road surface has
reached the limit: you must slow
down to match the speed to the road
grip available.
WARNING
The ABS exploits the tyre-
road grip at the best, but it
cannot improve it; you should there-
fore take every care when driving on
slippery surfaces without taking un-
necessary risks.
WARNING
When the ABS cuts in, and
you feel the brake pedal pul-
sating, do not remove your foot, but
keep it pressed; in doing so you will
stop in the shortest amount of space
possible under the current road con-
ditions.
WARNING
If the brake fluid low warn-
ing light
x
comes on (to-
gether with the message on the dis-
play), stop the car immediately and
contact the nearest Fiat Dealership.
Fluid leaks from the hydraulic system,
in fact, can compromise the braking
system, both traditional systems and
systems with ABS.
WARNING
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 95
96
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
ESP SYSTEM
(Electronic Stability
Program)
(where provided)
The ESP system is an electronic system
controlling the car stability in the event of
tyre grip loss.
The ESP system is therefore particularly
useful when grip conditions of the road sur-
faces changes.
ESP SYSTEM INTERVENTION
It is signalled by the blinking of the warn-
ing light
á
on the instrument panel, to in-
form the driver that the car is in critical
stability and grip conditions.
ESP SYSTEM OPERATION
The ESP system is automatically activat-
ed when the car is started and cannot be
de-activated.
FAILURE WARNINGS
In the event of failure, the ESP system is
automatically disconnected and the warn-
ing light
á
, comes on with fixed light on
the instrument panel, together with the
message on the display (see section
“Warning lights and messages”). In this
case contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as
possible.
At pickup the ESP system control unit will
keep brake force on wheels until reaching
the torque suitable for starting, or in any
case for max. 1.5 seconds in order to pass
easily from the brake pedal to the accel-
erator pedal.
After 1,5 seconds without starting, the
system will deactivate automatically by re-
leasing gradually the brake force.
At releasing, the typical brake disengage-
ment noise indicating that the car is go-
ing to move will be heard.
Failure indications
System failure is indicated by the turning
on of warning light
á
on the instrument
panel (together with the message on the
multifunction display) (see section “Warn-
ing lights and messages”).
IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system is
not a parking brake. Never get out of the
car without engaging the handbrake,
switching the engine off and engaging the
first gear (position P con with automatic
transmission).
Performance of the ESP sys-
tem, in terms of active safe-
ty should not induce the driver to take
pointless and unnecessary risks. The
style of driving must in any case al-
ways be adapted to the conditions of
the road surface, visibility an traffic.
Road safety is always the driver’s re-
sponsibility.
WARNING
HILL HOLDER SYSTEM
(where provided)
This system is an integral part of the ESP
system and it is provided to facilitate start-
ing on slopes.
It will activate automatically with the fol-
lowing conditions:
Uphill: car at a standstill on a road with a
gradient higher than 5%, engine running,
clutch and brake pedal pressed, gearbox
to neutral or engaged gear other than re-
verse.
Downhill: car at a standstill on a road with
a gradient higher than 5%, engine running,
clutch and brake pedal pressed and re-
verse gear engaged.
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 96
97
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
ASR SYSTEM
(AntiSlip Regulator)
(where provided)
The ASR function controls car drive and
cuts in automatically every time one or
both driving wheels slip.
According to slipping conditions, two dif-
ferent control systems are activated:
if slipping involves both driving wheels,
the ASR function intervenes reducing
the power transmitted by the engine;
if slipping involves only one driving
wheel, the TC (Traction Control)
function cuts in automatically braking
the wheel that is slipping.
The action of the ASR is particularly help-
ful in the following circumstances:
slipping of the inner wheel due to the
effect of dynamic load changes or ex-
cessive acceleration;
too much power transmitted to the
wheels also in relation to the condi-
tions of the road surface;
acceleration on slippery, snowy or
frozen surfaces;
in the case of loss of grip on a wet sur-
face (aquaplaning).
SWITCHING THE ASR SYSTEM
ON/OFF fig. 125
The ASR system switches on
automatically each time the engine is
started.
When travelling ASR can be switched off
and on again pressing switch A set aside
the gearshift lever.
When the ASR is switched off this is
shown by the lighting up of the led on the
switch and by the relevant message on the
display (see section “Warning lights and
messages”).
If the ASR is switched off when travelling,
it will turn on again automatically the next
time the engine is started.
During the use of the space-
saver spare wheel, the ESP
system carries on working. However,
you must remind that the space-saver
spare wheel has dimensions smaller
than the standard tyre and therefore
its grip is reduced as to the other car
tyres.
WARNING
For correct operation of the
ESP system, the tyres must
absolutely be of the same brand and
type on all wheels, in perfect condi-
tions and, above all, of type, brand
and size specified.
WARNING
fig. 125
F0L0052m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 97
98
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
When travelling on snowy roads with
snow chains, it may be helpful to turn the
ASR off: in fact, in these conditions, slip-
ping of the driving wheels when moving off
makes it possible to obtain better drive.
FAILURE INDICATIONS
In the event of malfunctioning, the ASR
system is automatically disconnected and
the warning light
á
will come on with
fixed light on the instrument together with
the message on the display (see section
“Warning lights and messages”). In this
case contact Fiat Dealership as soon as
possible.
EOBD SYSTEM
The European On Board Diagnostic sys-
tem (EOBD), fitted to engine electronic
control units, allows monitoring and warn-
ing of any malfunction to the electronic
systems that could increase exhaust emis-
sions.
The objective is:
To keep system efficiency under con-
trol;
Warn when a fault causes emission lev-
els to increase;
Warn of the need to replace deterio-
rated components.
This diagnostic system indicates the pres-
ence of deteriorated components or sys-
tem malfunctioning (see section “Warn-
ing lights and messages”) by the turning on
of the instrument panel warning light U
(together with the message on the dis-
play).
The performance of the sys-
tem, in terms of active safe-
ty should not induce the driver to take
pointless and unnecessary risks. The
style of driving must in any case al-
ways be adapted to the conditions of
the road surface, visibility an traffic.
Road safety is always the driver’s re-
sponsibility.
WARNING
For correct operation of the
ASR system, the tyres must
absolutely be of the same brand and
type on all wheels, in perfect condi-
tions and, above all, of type, brand
and size specified.
WARNING
For correct operation of the
ASR system, the tyres must
absolutely be of the same brand and
type on all wheels, in perfect condi-
tions and, above all, of type, brand
and size specified.
WARNING
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 98
99
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
NOTE The car is provided with a diag-
nostic connector that can be interfaced
with appropriate tools, which makes it
possible to read the error codes stored in
the control units, together with a series of
specific parameters for engine operation
and diagnosis. This test can also be per-
formed by traffic controller agents.
IMPORTANT: After a servicing operation
at Fiat Dealership aimed to eliminate mal-
functioning connected to the EOBD sys-
tem, in order to check the system thor-
oughly it could be required to run a bench
test and, if necessary, road tests which
may also call for a long journey.
TYRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
- T.P.M.S. (where
provided)
The car can be equipped with the T.P.M.S.
(Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). This
system consists of a radio-frequency sen-
sor, installed on each wheel (on the rim
inside the tyre) that sends pressure infor-
mation to the control unit.
IMPORTANT System control unit moni-
tors the pressure of the four car tyres but
not the space-saver spare wheel. It is
therefore recommended to always check
also the space-saver spare wheel pressure.
IMPORTANT Pay the utmost attention
when checking or inflating tyres. Excessive
pressure impairs road holding, increases
suspension and wheel stress and causes
abnormal tyre wear.
IMPORTANT Tyre pressure should be
checked with tyres rested and cold.
Should it become necessary for whatev-
er reason to check pressure with hot
tyres, do not reduce pressure although it
is higher than the prescribed value but re-
peat the check when tyres are cold.
The T.P.M.S. system does not
exempt the driver to check
tyre and space-saver spare wheel pres-
sure at regular intervals.
WARNING
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 99
100
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
IMPORTANT NOTES ABOUT
THE T.P.M.S. SYSTEM
Failure indications will not be stored and
therefore will not be displayed when turn-
ing the engine off and on again. If failure
persists, the control unit will send warn-
ing indications to the instrument panel on-
ly after a few seconds when the car is
moving.
IMPORTANT T.P.M.S. system cannot in-
dicate sudden tyre pressure drops (e.g.:
tyre burst). In this event, brake the car
cautiously and avoid sudden steering.
IMPORTANT Replacing standard tyres
with winter tyres and vice versa involves
T.P.M.S. system set-up that shall be per-
formed at Fiat Dealerships only.
IMPORTANT The T.P.M.S. system re-
quires special equipment. Consult Fiat
Dealership to know what type of acces-
sories are compatible with the system
(wheels, wheel caps, etc.). Using other ac-
cessories could cause system malfunc-
tioning.
IMPORTANT Tyre pressure could change
according to outside temperature. For this
reason the T.P.M.S. system could tem-
porarily indicate low tyre pressure. In this
event check pressure with cold tyres and
restore proper inflation values if required.
IMPORTANT If the car is fitted with
T.P.M.S. system, tyre and/or rim removal
and refitting operations involve special
precautions; to prevent damages or wrong
sensor refitting, contact Fiat Dealership to
have tyre and/or rim changed.
IMPORTANT If the car is fitted with
T.P.M.S. system, when changing a tyre,
change also the rubber seal of the valve.
Contact a Fiat Dealership.
IMPORTANT Strong radiofrequency
noise may inhibit regular TPMS system op-
eration; in this event, a dedicated message
will be displayed to warn the driver. This
message will disappear automatically as
soon as noise disappears.
SOUND SYSTEM
(where provided)
For the operation of the radio with
CD/MP3 CD (where provided), read the
instructions for use given in the Supple-
ment attached to the Owner Handbook.
SOUND SYSTEM
(where provided)
The system includes:
2 tweeters (power 40W max. each),
located on front doors;
2 mid-woofers, (diameter 165 mm,
power 40W max. each), located on
front doors;
2 full-range speakers, (diameter 165
mm, power 40W max. each), located
on rear doors.
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 100
101
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
HI-FI SYSTEM
(where provided)
The system includes:
2 tweeters (power 40W max. each),
located on front doors;
2 mid-woofers (diameter 165 mm,
power 40W max. each), located on
front doors;
2 tweeters (power 40W max. each),
located on rear doors;
2 mid-woofers (diameter 165 mm,
power 40W max. each), located on
rear doors;
n° 1 Box subwoofer bass reflex with
integral multichannel amplifier (4 x
25W RMS channels + 2 x 40W RMS
channels to drive the 165 mm woofer)
with SRS WOW effect ASP.
ACCESSORIES
PURCHASED BY THE
OWNER
If after buying the vehicle, you decide to
install electrical accessories that require a
permanent electric supply (alarm, satellite
antitheft system, etc.) or accessories that
in any case burden the electric supply,
contact Fiat Dealership, whose qualified
personnel, besides suggesting the most
suitable devices belonging to Lineaccessori
Fiat, will also evaluate the overall electric
absorption, checking whether the vehicle
electric system is able to withstand the
load required, or whether it needs to be
integrated with a more powerful battery.
INSTALLATION OF
ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC
DEVICES
Electric/electronic devices installed after
buying the vehicle and in after-market shall
bear the following marking:
Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorizes the installation
of transceivers, provided that installation
is workmanlike performed in compliance
with Manufacturer’s specifications at a spe-
cialised service centre.
IMPORTANT The installation of devices
involving modifications of vehicle charac-
teristics may determine the withdrawal of
ANTENNA fig. 126
To remove the antenna, unscrew the stem
A anticlockwise 1 until it is completely
outside the support.
To refit the antenna screw the stem A
clockwise 2 until it is fully closed and
aligned with support.
fig. 126
F0L0535m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 101
102
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
PARKING SENSORS
(where provided)
Parking sensors are located in the rear
bumper fig. 127 and their function is to
inform the driver, through an intermittent
buzzer, about the presence of obstacles
behind the car.
ACTIVATION
The sensors are automatically activated
when the reverse gear is engaged.
As the distance from the obstacle behind
the car decreases, the acoustic alarm be-
comes more frequent.
BUZZER WARNINGS
When the reverse gear is engaged an in-
termittent acoustic signal is automatically
activated.
The acoustic signal:
becomes louder as the reduction of
distance between the car and the ob-
stacle decreases;
becomes continuous when the dis-
tance between the car and the obsta-
cle is less that 30 cm and stops imme-
diately if the distance raises;
is constant if the distance is unvaried.
If this situation takes place for side sen-
sors, the signal is stopped after about
3 seconds to prevent sound indica-
tions when performing manoeuvres
near walls.
Direction distances
Central action radius 150 cm
Side action radius 60 cm
If several obstacles are detected, the con-
trol unit indicates the nearest one.
fig. 127
F0L0391m
the driving licence by the appointed pub-
lic authorities and the forfeiture of the
warranty as concerns defects/failures due
to said modification or leading directly or
indirectly to it.
Fiat Auto S.p.A. declines all responsibility
due to damages connected with the in-
stallation of accessories/devices not sup-
plied by or recommended by Fiat Auto
S.p.A. and installed not in compliance with
the specified prescriptions.
RADIO TRANSMITTERS
AND CELLULAR TELEPHONES
Radio transceiver equipment (e.g.: mobile
phones, HAM radio systems and the like)
shall not be used inside the vehicle unless
a separate aerial is mounted on the roof.
IMPORTANT The use of similar devices
inside the passenger compartment (with-
out separated aerial) produces radio-fre-
quency electromagnetic fields which, am-
plified by the resonance effects inside the
passenger compartment, may cause elec-
trical systems equipping the vehicle to mal-
function. This could compromise safety in
addition to constituting a potential hazard
for the passengers.
In addition, transmission and reception of
these devices may be affected by the
shielding effect of the vehicle body.
As concerns , approved mobile phones
(GSM, GPRS, UMTS), strictly comply with
the instructions for use provided by the
mobile phone’s manufacturer.
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 102
103
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
GENERAL WARNINGS
When parking, take the utmost care
to obstacles that may be set above or
under the sensors.
Objects set close to the car, under
certain circumstances are not detect-
ed and could therefore cause damages
to the car or be damaged.
Indications sent by the sensors can be
altered by dirt, snow or ice deposit-
ed on the sensors or by ultrasound
systems (e.g.: truck pneumatic brakes
or pneumatic hammers) set nearby the
car.
For proper operation, the
parking sensors shall always
be clean from mud, dirt, snow
or ice. When cleaning the sen-
sors, take the utmost care to prevent
their damaging; do not use therefore
dry or rough clothes. Sensors shall be
washed with clean water and car de-
tergent, if required.
Parking manoeuvres howev-
er are always under the dri-
ver’s responsibility that shall always
check the absence of people (spe-
cially children) or animals in the ma-
noeuvre space. This system is just a
help for the driver but she/he shall
never reduce attention during dan-
gerous manoeuvres even if performed
at low speed.
WARNING
FAILURE INDICATIONS
In the event of sensor failures, the driver
is warned by the turning on of warning
light
è
on the instrument panel and by
the relevant message on the display (see
section “Warning lights and messages”).
OPERATION WITH TRAILER
Parking sensor operation is deactivated
automatically when the trailer electric ca-
ble plug is fitted into the car tow hook
socket.
Sensors are reactivated when removing
the trailer cable plug.
In washing stations, clean sensors quickly
keeping the vapour jet/high pressure
washing nozzles at 10 cm at least from the
sensors.
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 103
104
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
DIESEL ENGINES
If the outside temperature is very low, the
diesel thickens due to the formation of
paraffins and could clog the diesel fuel fil-
ter.
In order to avoid these problems, differ-
ent types of diesel are distributed ac-
cording to the season: summer type, win-
ter type arctic type (mountains/cold ar-
eas).
If refuelling with diesel fuel not suitable for
the current temperature, mix diesel fuel
with TUTELA DIESEL ART additive in the
proportions stated on the can, putting first
the antifreeze in the tank and then the
diesel fuel.
Refuel with local diesel fuel if the car is
used/parked in the mountains or in cold
areas for a long period. In this event you
are recommended to keep an amount of
fuel higher than 50% in the tank.
The car must only be filled
with diesel fuel for motor ve-
hicles, in compliance with Eu-
ropean Standard EN590. The
use of other products or mixtures may
irreparably damage the engine with in-
validation of the warranty due to the
damage caused. In the event of acci-
dentally filling with another type of fu-
el, do not start the engine and empty
the tank. If the engine has been run
even for only a very short time, in ad-
dition to the tank, it is also necessary
to drain out the whole fuel circuit.
REFUELLING
To guarantee full tank filling, carry out two
refuelling operations after the first click of
the fuel delivery gun. Avoid further top-
ping up operations that could cause dam-
ages to the fuel system.
AT THE FILLING
STATION
PETROL ENGINES
Use only unleaded petrol.
To prevent errors, the diameter of the fu-
el tank filler is too small to introduce a lead
petrol pump filler. Use petrol with a rat-
ed octane number (R.O.N.) not lower
than 95.
IMPORTANT An inefficient catalyst leads
to harmful exhaust emissions, thus con-
tributing to air pollution.
IMPORTANT Never use leaded petrol,
even in small amount or in an emergency,
as this would damage the catalyst beyond
repair.
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 104
105
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
The devices for curtailing petrol engine
emissions are the following:
three-way catalytic converter;
Lambda sensor;
fuel evaporation system.
In addition, do not let the engine run, even
for a test, with one or more spark plugs
disconnected.
The devices for curtailing diesel fuel en-
gine emissions are the following:
oxidising catalytic converter;
exhaust gas recirculation system
(E.G.R.);
diesel particulate filter (DPF).
FUEL FILLER CAP fig. 128
The fuel filler cap lock is automatically con-
trolled by the central door lock.
In an emergency (e.g.: electric system fail-
ure) it is possible to unlock it by pulling
string B. To find the string, remove the
right-hand side cover A.
To carry out fuelling, open flap C-fig. 129
and unscrew cap D; the cap is fitted with
an antiloss device E which fastens it to the
flap so it cannot be mislaid.
The sealing of the tank may cause light
pressurising in the tank. A little breathing
off, while slackening the cap, is absolutely
normal.
When refuelling, position the cap on the
device inside the flap as shown in the fig-
ure.
If the doors are locked, press the door un-
lock button
´
on central panel to refuel.
The fuel filler cap is re-locked when the
doors are locked.
fig. 128
F0L0137m
Do not put naked flames or
lighted cigarettes near the
fuel filler hole as there is a danger of
fire. Do not bend too close to the hole
either so as not to breathe in harmful
vapours.
WARNING
fig. 129
F0L0526m
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 105
106
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
(DPF)
The Diesel Particulate Filter is a mechan-
ical filter, integral with the exhaust system,
that physically traps particulates present
in the exhaust gases of Diesel engines.
The diesel particular filter has been adopt-
ed to eliminate almost totally particulates
in compliance with current / future law
regulations.
During normal use of the car, the engine
control unit records a set of data (e.g.:
travel time, type of route, temperatures,
etc.) and it will then calculate how much
particulates has been trapped by the filter.
Since this filter physically traps particulates,
it shall be cleaned (reclaimed) at regular
intervals by burning carbon particles.
Reclaiming procedure is controlled auto-
matically by the engine control unit ac-
cording to the filter conditions and the
conditions of use of the car.
During reclaiming the following phenom-
ena could take place: idling slight increase,
fan activation, slight smoke increase, high
exhaust temperatures. These situations
shall not be considered as faults and they
do not affect car performance and envi-
ronment.
If the dedicated message is displayed, re-
fer to section “Warning lights and mes-
sages”.
During normal service the
diesel particulate filter (DPF)
reaches high temperatures. Do not
therefore park the car over inflam-
mable materials (grass, dry leaves,
pine needles, etc.): fire hazard.
WARNING
During normal service the
catalyst reaches high tem-
peratures. Do not therefore park the
car over inflammable materials (grass,
dry leaves, pine needles, etc.): fire
hazard.
WARNING
070-106 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 15:03 Pagina 106
107
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IINDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
SEAT BELTS ........................................................................... 108
S.B.R. SYSTEM ....................................................................... 109
PRETENSIONERS.................................................................. 110
CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY...................................... 112
PRESETTING FOR MOUNTING THE
“UNIVERSAL ISOFIX” CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM . 117
FRONT AND SIDE AIR BAGS .......................................... 118
SIDE AIR BAGS .................................................................... 122
SS
S
A
A
F
F
E
E
T
T
Y
Y
D
D
E
E
V
V
I
I
C
C
E
E
S
S
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 107
108
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
SEAT BELTS
USING THE SEAT BELTS
The belt should be worn keeping the chest
straight and rested against the seat back.
To fasten the seat belts, take hold the
tongue A-fig. 1 and insert it into the buck-
le B-fig. 1, until hearing the locking click.
At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for a
short stretch, then pull it out again with-
out jerking.
To unfasten the seat belts, press button
C-fig. 1. Guide the seat belt with your
hand while it is rewinding, to prevent it
from twisting.
Through the reel, the belt automatically
adapts to the body of the passenger wear-
ing it, allowing freedom of movement.
When the car is parked on a steep slope
the reel mechanism may block; this is nor-
mal. The reel mechanism prevents the
webbing coming out when it is jerked or
if the car brakes sharply, in a collision or
when cornering at high speed.
The rear seat is fitted with inertial seat belts
with three anchor points and reel fig. 2.
Rear seat belts shall be worn as shown in
the figure.
IMPORTANT When using side and cen-
tral seat belts at the same time, fasten first
the side seat belt and then the central one.
fig. 1
F0L0119m
fig. 2
F0L0120m
Never press button C when
travelling.
WARNING
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 108
109
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IINDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
IMPORTANT Correct backrest fastening
is guaranteed when the “red band” B-fig.
3 aside levers A-fig. 3 is no longer visible.
The “red band” actually indicates that the
backrest is not properly secured. When
setting the backrest to travelling position,
always make sure it is properly secured by
hearing the locking click.
IMPORTANT After putting the seats back
to their travelling position, restore the
seat belt position to make them ready for
use.
S.B.R. SYSTEM
The car is fitted with the S.B.R. system
(Seat Belt Reminder), consisting of a
buzzer which, together with the turning
on of warning light
<
on the instrument
panel, warns the driver to fasten the seat
belt.
For permanent deactivation, contact Fiat
Dealership.With multifunction display, the
S.B.R. system can only be reset at Fiat
Dealership.
With reconfigurable multifunction display,
the S.B.R. system can also be reset through
the set-up menu.
fig. 3
F0L0233m
Never press button C-fig. 1
when travelling.
WARNING
Remember that in the event
of a violent collision, back
seat passengers not wearing seat belts
also represent a serious danger for
the front seat passengers.
WARNING
Make sure the backrest is
properly secured at both
sides (red bands B not visible) to pre-
vent it moves forward in the event of
sharp braking causing injuries to pas-
sengers.
WARNING
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 109
110
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
PRETENSIONERS
To increase the efficiency of the seat belts,
the car is fitted with front and rear pre-
tensioners (where provided). These de-
vices, in the event of a violent crash,
rewind the seat belts a few centimetres.
In this way they ensure that the seat belt
adheres perfectly to the wearer before the
restraining action begins.
Front pretensioners activation is indicat-
ed by buckle withdrawal downwards.
Rear pretensioners (where provided) ac-
tivation is indicated by seat belt retractor
locking; the seat belt cannot be drawn
back up when guiding it manually.
IMPORTANT To obtain the highest de-
gree of protection from the action of the
pretensioning device, wear the seat belt
keeping it firmly close to the chest and
pelvis.
Pretensioner activation may produce a
small amount of smoke. This smoke is in
no way toxic and presents no fire hazard.
The pretensioner does not require any
maintenance or greasing.
Anything that modifies its original condi-
tions invalidates its efficiency.
If due to unusual natural events (floods,
seas storm, etc.) the device has been af-
fected by water and mud, it must neces-
sarily be replaced.
LOAD LIMITERS
To increase passenger’s safety, the front
and rear (where provided) seat belt reels
contain a load limiter which allows con-
trolled sag in such a way as to dose the
force acting on the chest and shoulders
during the belt restraining action in case
of front crash.
The pretensioner can only
be used once. After a colli-
sion that has triggered it, have it re-
placed at a Fiat Dealership. Preten-
sioner validity is written on the label
set on the door contour sheet metal.
Pretensioners should be replaced at
Fiat Dealership as this date ap-
proaches.
WARNING
Operations which lead to
knocks, vibrations or localised
heating (over 100°C for a
maximum of 6 hours) in the
area around the pretensioners may
cause damage or trigger them. These
devices are not affected by vibrations
caused by irregularities of the road sur-
face or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc.
Contact a Fiat Dealership for any as-
sistance.
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 110
111
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IINDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR
USING THE SEAT BELTS
The driver must comply with (and have
the car occupants follow) all the local le-
gal regulations concerning the use of seat
belts. Always fasten the seat belts before
starting.
Seat belts are also to be worn by expec-
tant mothers: the risk of injury in the case
of accident is greatly reduced for them and
the unborn child if they are wearing a seat
belt.
Of course they must position the lower
part of the belt very low down so that it
passes under the abdomen (as illustrated
in fig. 4).
fig. 4
F0L0060m
fig. 5
F0L0061m
fig. 6
F0L0062m
The belt should not be twist-
ed. The upper part should
pass over the shoulder and cross the
chest diagonally. The lower part
should adhere to the pelvis and not
the abdomen of the passenger. Do
not use any objects (pegs, stoppers,
etc.) to keep the belts away from the
body.
WARNING
For maximum safety, keep
the back of your seat up-
right, lean back into it and make sure
the seat belt fits closely across your
chest and hips. Make sure that the
seat belts of the front and rear pas-
sengers are fastened at all times! You
increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a collision if you travel with
the belts unfastened.
WARNING
Under no circumstances
should the components of
the seat belts and pretensioners be
tampered with or removed. Any op-
eration should be carried out by qual-
ified and authorised personnel. Al-
ways contact a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 111
112
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT
BELTS ALWAYS IN EFFICIENT
CONDITIONS
Always use the belt with the tape taut
and never twisted; make sure that it is
free to run without impediments.
After a serious accident, replace the
belt being worn at that time, even if
it does not appear damaged. Always
replace the seat belts if pretensioners
have been activated.
To clean the belts, wash by hand with
neutral soap, rinse and leave to dry in
the shade. Never use strong deter-
gents, bleach or dyes or other chem-
ical substance that might weaken the
fibres.
Prevent the reels from getting wet:
their correct operation is only guar-
anteed if water does not get inside.
Replace the seat belt when showing
significant wear or cut signs.
CARRYING CHILDREN
SAFELY
For optimal protection in the event of a
crash, all passengers must be seated and
wearing adequate restraint systems.
This is even more important for children.
This prescription is compulsory in all EC
countries according to EC Directive
2003/20/EC.
Compared with adults, their head is pro-
portionally larger and heavier than the rest
of the body, while the muscles and bone
structure are not completely developed.
Therefore, correct restraint systems are
necessary, other than adult seat belts. The
results of research on the best child re-
straint systems are contained in the Euro-
pean Standard EEC-R44. This Standard en-
forces the use of restraint systems classi-
fied in five groups:
Group 0 - 0-10 kg in weight
Group 0+ - 0-13 kg in weight
Group 1 9-18 kg in weight
Group 2 15-25 kg in weight
Group 3 22-36 kg in weight
If the belt has been subject-
ed to heavy stress, for ex-
ample after and accident, it should be
changed completely together with
the anchors, anchor fastening screws
and the pretensioners. In fact, even if
the belt has no visible defects, it could
have lost its resilience.
WARNING
Never travel with a child sit-
ting on the passenger’s lap
with a single belt to protect them
both. Do not fasten other objects to
the body.
WARNING
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 112
113
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IINDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
As it may be noted, the groups overlap
partly and in fact, in commerce it is pos-
sible to find devices that cover more than
one weight group.
All restraint devices must bear the certi-
fication data, together with the control
brand, on a solidly fixed label which must
absolutely never be removed.
Over 1.50 m in height, from the point of
view of restraint systems, children are
considered as adults and wear the seat
belts normally.
Lineaccessori Fiat offers seats for each
weight group, which are the recommend-
ed choice, as they have been designed and
experimented specifically for Fiat cars.
SERIOUS DANGER: Never
place cradle child’s seats
facing backwards on the
front passenger seat of cars
fitted with passenger’s air
bag since the air bag activa-
tion could cause serious injuries, even
mortal. You are advised to carry chil-
dren always on the rear seat, as this
is the most protected position in the
case of a crash. In any case, children’s
seats must absolutely not be fitted on
the front seat of cars with passenger’s
air bag, which during inflation could
cause serious injury, even mortal, re-
gardless of the seriousness of the
crash that triggered it.
WARNING
Children may be placed on
the front seat of cars fitted
with passenger’s air bag deactivation.
In this case it is absolutely necessary
to check the amber warning light on
the cluster to make sure that deacti-
vation has actually taken place (see
paragraph front and side air bags at
point front passenger’s air bag). The
front passenger’s seat shall be ad-
justed in the most backward position
to prevent any contact between
child’s seat and dashboard.
WARNING
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 113
114
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
GROUP 0 and 0+ fig. 7
Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing
backwards on a cradle seat, which, sup-
porting the head, does not induce stress
on the neck in the event of sharp decel-
eration.
The cradle is restrained by the car seat
belts and in turn it must restrain the child
with its own belts.
GROUP 2
Starting from 15 kg to 25 kg in weight, chil-
dren may be restrained directly by the car
belts. The only function of the seat is to
position the child correctly in relation to
the belts, so that the diagonal part adheres
to the chest and not to the neck and that
the horizontal part clings to the child’s
pelvis and not the abdomen fig. 9.
fig. 7
F0L0063m
The figure is only an example for mounting. Attain to the instructions
for fastening which must be enclosed with the specific child restrain-
ing system you are using.
WARNING
Seats exist which are suitable for covering weight groups 0 and 1 with
a rear connection to the car belts and their own belts to restrain the
child. Due to their size, they can be dangerous if installed incorrectly fastened
to the car belts with a cushion. Carefully follow the instructions for installa-
tion provided with the seat.
WARNING
fig. 8
F0L0064m
GROUP 1
Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, chil-
dren may be carried facing forwards, with
seat fitted with front cushion, through
which the car seat belt restrains both child
and seat fig. 8.
fig. 9
F0L0065m
The figure is only an exam-
ple for mounting. Attain to
the instructions for fastening which
must be enclosed with the specific
child restraining system you are using.
WARNING
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 114
115
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IINDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
Group 3
For children from 22 kg to 36 kg the size
of the child’s chest no longer requires a
support to space the child’s back from the
seat back.
Fig. 10 shows proper child seat posi-
tioning on the rear seat.
Children taller than 1.50 m can wear seat
belts like adults.
fig. 10
F0L0066m
The figure is only an exam-
ple for mounting. Attain to
the instructions for fastening which
must be enclosed with the specific
child restraining system you are using.
WARNING
PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON
CHILD’S SEAT USE
Your car complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC regulating child’s seat
assembling on the different car seats according to the following table:
SEAT
Range of Front Rear Central
Group weight passenger side passenger
passenger
Group 0, 0+ up to 13 kg U (
)U *
Group 1 9-18 kg U (
)U *
Group 2 15-25 kg U (
)U *
Group 3 22-36 kg U (
)U *
Key:
U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to Eu-
ropean Standard EEC-R44 for the specified “Groups”.
(
) on cars not fitted with passenger’s seat adjustable in height, the seat back shall be
positioned perfectly upright.
(*) Never mount child restraint systems on the rear central seat.
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 115
116
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
Below is a summary of the rules of
safety to be followed for carrying
children:
1) The recommended position for in-
stalling child’s seat is on the rear seat, as
it is the most protected in the case of a
crash.
2) If the passenger airbag is deactivated,
always check that it is properly deactivat-
ed by ensuring the warning light is on
with a fixed light on the instrument pan-
el.
3) Attain to the instructions for fastening
the specific child restraint system which
you are using. These instructions must be
provided by the manufacturer. Keep the
child restraint system installation instruc-
tions with the car documents and this
Handbook. Never use a child restraint sys-
tem without installation instructions.
4) Always check the seat belt is well fas-
tened by pulling the webbing.
5) Only one child is to be strapped to
each retaining system.
6) Always check the seat belts do not fit
around the child’s throat.
7) While travelling, do not let the child
sit incorrectly or release the belts.
8) Passengers should never carry children
on their laps. No-one, however strong
they are, can hold a child in the event of
a crash.
9) In case of an accident, replace the
child’s seat with a new one.
With passenger’s air bag ac-
tive, never place child’s seats
with the cradle facing backwards
since the air bag activation could
cause to the child serious injuries,
even mortal, regardless of the seri-
ousness of the crash that triggered it.
You are advised to carry children al-
ways with proper restraint systems on
the rear seats, as this is the most pro-
tected position in the case of a crash.
WARNING
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 116
117
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IINDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
PRESETTING FOR
MOUNTING THE
“UNIVERSAL ISOFIX”
CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
This car is preset for mounting the Uni-
versal Isofix child restraint system, a new
European standardised system for carry-
ing children safely.
Fig. 11 shows a child restraint system by
way of example.
The Universal Isofix child’s seat covers
weight group: 1.
Due to its different anchoring system, the
Universal Isofix child’s seat shall be an-
chored to the proper lower metal rings
A-fig. 12, set between rear seat back and
cushion. The upper belt (provided with
the child’s seat) shall be then secured to
ring B-fig. 13 set on rear seat backrest.
It is possible to mount at the same time
both the traditional restraint system and
the “Universal Isofix” one.
Remember that in case of Universal Isofix
child’s seat, you can only use all those
seats approved with the marking ECE
R44/03 “Universal Isofix”.
At Lineaccessori Fiat is available the “Uni-
versal Isofix” “Duo Plus” child’s seat.
For any further installation/use detail, re-
fer to the “Instructions Manual” that must
be provided by the child restraint system
Manufacturer.
fig. 11
F0L0318m
fig. 12
F0L0121m
Mount the child restraint
system only with the car sta-
tionary. The Isofix child restraint sys-
tem is properly anchored to the
mounting brackets when clicks are
heard. In any case, keep to the in-
stallation instructions that must be
provided by the child restraint system
Manufacturer.
WARNING
fig. 13
F0L0122m
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 117
FRONT AND SIDE AIR
BAGS
The car is fitted with front air bags for the
driver, for the passenger and with driver’s
knees air bag (where provided).
The front driver / passenger air bags and
the driver’s knees air bag (where provid-
ed) have been designed to protect the oc-
cupants in the event of head-on crashes of
medium-high severity, by placing the cush-
ion between the occupant and the steer-
ing wheel or dashboard.
Front air bags are designed to protect
car’s occupants in front crashes and there-
fore non-activation in other types of col-
lisions (side collisions, rear shunts, roll-
overs, etc.) is not a system malfunction.
In case of crash, an electronic control unit,
when required, triggers the inflation of the
cushion. The cushion immediately inflates,
placing itself as a protection between the
body of the front occupants and the struc-
ture that could cause injuries. Immediate-
ly after, the cushion deflates.
The front driver / passenger air bags and
the driver’s knees air bag (where provid-
ed) are not a replacement of but comple-
mentary to the use of belts, which should
always be worn, as specified by law in Eu-
rope and most non European countries.
118
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON
UNIVERSAL ISOFIX CHILD’S SEAT USE
The table below, according to ECE 16 European Directive, shows the different instal-
lation possibilities of Universal Isofix restraint systems on seats fitted with Isofix fas-
teners.
Range of weight Child’s seat Isofix Isofix position
orientation class side rear
Group 0 to 10 kg
Group 0+ to 13 kg
Group I - 9
to 18 kg
IUF: suitable for Isofix child restraint systems to be set facing forwards, universal class
(fitted with third upper fastener), approved for the weight group.
IL: suitable for Isofix TYPE child restraint systems, specific and approved for this type
of car. The child’s seat can be installed by moving forward the front seat.
Facing backwards
Facing backwards
Facing backwards
Facing backwards
Facing backwards
Facing backwards
Facing forwards
Facing forwards
Facing forwards
E
E
D
C
D
C
B
B1
A
IL
IL
IL
IL
IL
IL
IUF
IUF
IUF
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 118
119
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IINDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
At their maximum inflation, their volume
fills most of the space between the dash-
board and the passenger.
In case of crash, a person not wearing the
seat belt moves forward and may come in-
to contact with the cushion while it is still
inflating. Under this circumstance the pro-
tection offered by the air bag is reduced.
Front air bag may not be activated in the
following situations:
in collisions against highly deformable
objects not affecting the car front sur-
face (e.g. bumper collision against
guard rail, etc.);
in case of wedging under other vehi-
cles or protective barriers (for exam-
ple under a truck or guard rail), the air
bag is not triggered as it offers no ad-
ditional protection compared with the
seat belts, consequently it would be
pointless. Therefore, failure to come
into action in the above circumstance
does not mean that the system is not
working properly.
In minor crashes (for which the restrain-
ing action of the seat belts is sufficient), the
air bags are not deployed. Also in this case
it is of vital importance to wear the seat
belts since in case of side crash they guar-
antee proper positioning of the occupant
and prevent the occupants to be pitched
out of the car in case of violent crashes.
Do not apply stickers or oth-
er objects to the steering
wheel or to the air bag cover on the
passenger’s side or on the side roof
lining. Never put objects on the dash-
board on passenger side since they
could interfere with proper air bag in-
flation .
WARNING
DRIVER’S FRONT AIR BAG fig. 14
It consists of an instant-inflating cushion
contained in a special recess in the cen-
tre of the steering wheel.
fig. 14
10
0
0
70
F0L0360m
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 119
120
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG
fig. 15
It consists of an instant-inflating cushion
contained into a special recess in the
dashboard, this cushion has a volume big-
ger than that of the driver.
DRIVER’S KNEES AIR BAG
(where provided) fig. 16
Knees air bag consists of an instant-inflat-
ing cushion housed into a special com-
partment provided for the purpose under
the steering wheel at driver’s knees lev-
el, designed to give further protection in
the event of frontal crash.
SERIOUS DANGER: With
passenger’s air bag active,
never place child’s seats with the cra-
dle facing backwards since the air bag
activation could cause to the child se-
rious injuries, even mortal. In the case
of need, always deactivate the pas-
senger’s air bag when a child’s seat
is placed on the front seat.
The front passenger’s seat shall be ad-
justed in the most backward position
to prevent any contact between
child’s seat and dashboard. Even if
not compulsory by law, you are rec-
ommended to reactivate the air bag
immediately as soon as child trans-
port is no longer necessary.
WARNING
fig. 15
F0L0068m
fig. 16
F0L0383m
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 120
121
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IINDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
TURNING OFF THE PASSENGER
SIDE FRONT AND SIDE CHEST
PROTECTION AIR BAGS
(Side bags) (where provided)
If it is absolutely necessary to transport a
child on the front seat, the passenger side
front and side chest protection air bags
can be turned off (Side Bag).
Two conditions may occur:
passenger side front and side chest
protection air bags (Side Bags) on:
warning light
F
on the instrument
panel off; it is absolutely prohibited to
ransport children on the front seat.
passenger side front and side chest
protection air bags (Side Bags) off:
warning light
F
on the instrument
panel on; it is possible to transport
children on the front seat using prop-
er restraining systems.
The warning light
F
on the instrument
panel will remain on with a stationary light
until the passenger side front and side
chest protection air bags are turned on
again (Side Bags).
To turn off the passenger
side front and side chest pro-
tection air bags (if foreseen), please
refer to the paragraphs “Multifunc-
tional display” and “Reconfigurable
multifunctional display” in the ”Dash-
board and controls” chapter.
WARNING
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 121
122
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
FRONT AND REAR SIDE BAGS -
CHEST PROTECTION
(where provided) fig. 17
These side bags consist of two types of in-
stant inflation cushions housed in the seat
back rests and designed to increase pro-
tection of the occupants’ chest in the
event of a side crash of medium-high
severity.
SIDE WINDOW BAGS - HEAD
PROTECTION (where provided)
fig. 18
They are “curtain” cushions located be-
hind the side coverings of the roof and
covered by proper finishings, studied for
the head protection to offer the best pro-
tection to the front and rear occupants
in the event of side crash, thanks to the
wide cushion inflation surface.
IMPORTANT In the event of side crash,
you can obtain the best protection by the
system keeping a correct position on the
seat, allowing thus correct side bag unfold-
ing.
fig. 17
F0L0125m
fig. 18
F0L0069m
SIDE AIR BAGS
The car is fitted with front side bags for
driver and passenger (where provided),
front and rear window bags (where pro-
vided) for protecting front and rear oc-
cupant’s head, rear side bags for driver and
passenger (where provided).
Side bags (where provided) protect car
occupants from side crashes of medium-
high severity, by placing the cushion be-
tween the occupant and the internal parts
of the side structure of the car.
Non-activation of side bags in other types
of collisions (front collisions, rear shunts,
roll-overs, etc...) is not a system malfunc-
tion.
In case of side crash, an electronic control
unit, when required triggers the inflation
of the cushion. The cushion immediately
inflates, placing itself as a protection, be-
tween the occupant’s body and the struc-
ture that could cause injuries. Immediate-
ly after, the cushion deflates.
Side bags (where provided) are not a re-
placement of but complementary to the
belts, which you are recommended to al-
ways wear, as specified by law in Europe
and most non-European countries.
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 122
TURNING OFF THE REAR SIDE
CHEST PROTECTION AIR BAGS
(Rear Side Bags) (where provided)
If it is absolutely necessary to transport a
child on the rear seats, the rear side chest
protection air bags can be turned off (Rear
Side Bags) (where provided).
Two conditions may occur:
rear side chest protection air bags on:
warning light
À
on the instrument
panel off; it is absolutely prohibited to
transport children on the rear seats.
rear side chest protection air bags off:
warning light
À
on the instrument
panel on; it is possible to transport
children on the rear seats using prop-
er restraining systems.
The warning light
À
on the instrument
panel will remain on with a stationary light
until the rear side air bags are turned on
again (Rear Side Bags).
123
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IINDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
Never rest head, arms and
elbows on the door, on the
windows and in the window bag area
to prevent possible injuries during in-
flation phase.
WARNING
Never lean head, arms and
elbows out of the window.
WARNING
Do not cover the backrest of
front seats with trims or cov-
ers that are not suitable to be used
with side bags.
WARNING
Do not hook rigid objects to
the coat hooks and to the
support handles.
WARNING
To turn off the rear side
chest protection air bags
(Rear Side Bags) (if foreseen), please
refer to the paragraphs “Multifunc-
tional display” and “Reconfigurable
multifunctional display” in the “Dash-
board and controls” chapter.
WARNING
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 123
124
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
GENERAL WARNINGS
1) The front air bags and/or front and
front side bags (where provided) may be
deployed if the car is subject to heavy
knocks or accidents involving the under-
body area, such as for example violent
shocks, against steps, kerbs or low obsta-
cles, falling of the car in big holes or sags
in the road.
2) When the airbag inflates it emits a small
amount of dusts. These dusts are harm-
less and is not the beginning of a fire; then
the unfold cushion surface and the car in-
teriors can be covered by a dusty remains:
this dust can irritate skin and eyes. In case
of contact, wash yourself using neutral
soap and water.
3) Should an accident occur in which any
of the safety devices is activated, take the
car to a Fiat Dealership to have the de-
vices activated replaced and to have the
system checked.
Every control, repair and replacement op-
erations concerning the air bags must on-
ly be carried out c/o Fiat Dealership.
If you are having the car scrapped, have
the air bag system deactivated at a Fiat
Dealership first. If the car changes own-
ership, the new owner must be informed
of the method of use of air bags and the
above warnings and also be given this
“Owner Handbook”.
4) The triggering of pretensioners, front
air bags and front side bags is decided in
a differentiated manner, depending on the
type of crash. The failure to deploy one or
more of them does not mean that the sys-
tem is not working properly.
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 124
125
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IINDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
If the car has been stolen or
an attempt to steal it has
been made, if it has been subjected to
vandals or floods, have the air bag
system checked by Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
Never travel with objects on
your lap, in front of your
chest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. be-
tween your lips; injury may result in
the event of the air bag being trig-
gered.
WARNING
Life and validity of pyrotech-
nic charge and coil contact
are indicated on the label located in-
side the lower oddment compart-
ment. As this date approaches, con-
tact Fiat Dealership to have them re-
placed.
WARNING
If when turning the ignition
key to ON, the warning light
¬ does not turn on or if it stays on
when travelling (together with the
message on the display) there could
be a failure in safety systems; in this
event air bags or pretensioners could
not trigger in case of impact or, in a
minor number of cases, they could
trigger accidentally. Contact Fiat
Dealership immediately to have the
system checked.
WARNING
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 125
126
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
The front air bag is triggered
for shocks greater in magni-
tude than the pretensioners. For im-
pacts between these two thresholds,
it is therefore normal that only the
pretensioners are triggered.
WARNING
By turning the ignition key to
the ON position, warning
light
F
(with front and side pas-
senger side air bags on) will turn on
and flash for a few seconds to remind
you that the passenger air bags will
be activated in the case of a collision,
afterwards it will turn off.
WARNING
Remember that with the key
engaged and at ON, even
with the engine not running, the air
bags may be triggered on a stationary
car if it is bumped by another moving
car. Therefore, never seat children on
the front seat even when the car is
stationary. On the other hand, please
remember that when the key is not
inserted in the ignition or is in the OFF
position, safety devices (air bag or
pretensioner) will not activate as a re-
sult of a collision; the failed activa-
tion of these devices in these cases
cannot therefore be considered as an
index of system malfunctioning.
WARNING
The air bag does not substi-
tute the seat belts, but only
increases their effectiveness. More-
over, since the front air bags do not
come into operation in the event of
front impact at low speed, side colli-
sions, bumps from behind or over-
turning, in these circumstances the
occupants would only be protected
by the seat belts which must therefore
always be fastened.
WARNING
By turning the ignition key
to the ON position, the
warning light
À
(with rear side
chest protection air bags on) will
turn on and flash for a few seconds
to remind you that the rear air bags
will be activated in the case of a col-
lision, afterwards it will turn off.
WARNING
107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 126
127
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
STARTING THE ENGINE ................................................. 128
PARKING................................................................................ 131
MANUAL TRANSMISSION ............................................... 132
ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ........... 133
CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS................................. 138
TOWING TRAILERS............................................................ 139
SNOW TYRES....................................................................... 142
SNOW CHAINS ................................................................... 143
CAR INACTIVITY................................................................. 144
CC
C
O
O
R
R
R
R
E
E
C
C
T
T
U
U
S
S
E
E
O
O
F
F
T
T
H
H
E
E
C
C
A
A
R
R
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 127
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR
PETROL VERSIONS
Proceed as follows:
Ensure that the handbrake is up;
put the gear lever into neutral (posi-
tions P or N for automatic transmis-
sion);
press the clutch pedal (or brake ped-
al with automatic transmission) down
to the floor without pressing the ac-
celerator;
turn the ignition key to START and
let it go the moment the engine starts.
If the engine does not start at the first at-
tempt, return the ignition key to OFF be-
fore repeating starting.
IMPORTANT In the event of fast engine
start-up (i.e.: fitting the ignition key and
turning it to ON), any slight jamming is to
be attributed to correct recognition of the
electronic key by the ignition switch.
ENGINE STARTING
The car is fitted with an electronic engine
lock device: if the engine fails to start, see
the paragraph “The Fiat CODE system” in
section “Dashboard and controls”.
The engine may be noisier than usual dur-
ing the first seconds of operation, espe-
cially after it has not been used for a while.
This characteristic feature of the hydraulic
tappet system does not compromise func-
tionality or reliability. This timing system
for petrol engines was adopted to limit
servicing.
128
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
We recommend that during
the initial period you do not
drive to full car performance
(e.g.: excessive acceleration,
long journeys at top speed, sharp brak-
ing, etc.).
When the engine is switched
off never leave the key into
the ignition switch to prevent
pointless current absorption
from draining the battery.
Running the engine in con-
fined areas is extremely dan-
gerous. The engine consumes oxygen
and produces carbon monoxide
which is a highly toxic and lethal gas.
WARNING
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 128
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR
MULTIJET VERSIONS
Proceed as follows:
Ensure that the handbrake is up;
Put the gear lever into neutral (posi-
tions P or N for automatic transmis-
sion);
Turn the ignition key to ON: the
warning lights
m
and
Y
on the in-
strument panel will turn on;
Wait for the warning lights
m
and
Y
to turn off. The hotter the engine
is, the quicker this will happen;
Press the clutch pedal (or brake ped-
al with automatic transmission) down
to the floor without pressing the ac-
celerator;
Turn the ignition key to START as
soon as warning light
m
goes out. If
you wait too long you will lose the
benefit of the work done by the glow
plugs. Release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
IMPORTANT With cold engine, the accel-
erator pedal shall be completely released
while turning the ignition key to START.
If the engine does not start at the first at-
tempt, return the ignition key to OFF be-
fore repeating starting.
IMPORTANT In the event of fast engine
start-up (i.e.: fitting the ignition key and
turning it to ON), any slight jamming is to
be attributed to correct recognition of the
electronic key by the ignition switch.
IMPORTANT If when fitting the key into
the ignition switch, the multifunction dis-
play shows the message stating that the
electronic key has not been recognised,
remove and refit the key; if the problem
persists try with the other keys provided
with the car. If you still cannot start the
engine, contact Fiat Dealership.
IMPORTANT If it is not possible to turn
the ignition key to ON, remove the emer-
gency key, fit it into slot A-fig. 1 to un-
lock the ignition switch; then, turn the key
to ON and follow the starting procedure.
Contact Fiat Dealership.
IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition key
into the ignition switch when the engine
is off. In this event, when opening the dri-
ver’s door, a buzzer will sound for about
1 second.
IMPORTANT If when fitting the key into
the ignition switch, the multifunction dis-
play shows the message stating that the
electronic key has not been recognised,
remove and refit the key; if the problem
persists try with the other keys provided
with the car. If you still cannot start the
engine, contact Fiat Dealership.
IMPORTANT If it is not possible to turn
the ignition key to ON, remove the emer-
gency key, fit it into slot A-fig. 1 to un-
lock the ignition switch; then, turn the key
to ON and follow the starting procedure.
Contact Fiat Dealership.
IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition key
into the ignition switch when the engine
is off. In this event, when opening the dri-
ver’s door, a buzzer will sound for about
1 second.
129
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
fig. 1
FF0L0206m
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 129
HOW TO WARM UP THE
ENGINE AFTER IT HAS JUST
STARTED (petrol and diesel
engines)
Proceed as follows:
Drive off slowly, letting the engine turn
at medium revs. Do not accelerate
abruptly;
Do not drive at full performance for
the initial kilometres. Wait until the
coolant temperature gauge starts
moving.
130
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Never bump start the engine
by pushing, towing or coasting
downhill as this could cause
fuel to flow into the catalytic
exhaust system and damage it beyond
repair.
A quick burst on the acceler-
ator before turning off the en-
gine serves absolutely no prac-
tical purpose, it wastes fuel
and is damaging especially to tur-
bocharged engines.
Remember that the servo-
brake and power steering
are not operational until the engine
has been started, therefore much ef-
fort than usual is required on the
brake pedal and steering wheel.
WARNING
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Turn the ignition key to OFF while the
engine is idling.
IMPORTANT After a taxing drive, you
should allow the engine to “catch its
breath” before turning it off by letting it
idle to allow the temperature in the en-
gine compartment to fall.
IMPORTANT If the engine is turned off
while the car is still moving, for safety rea-
sons it will be impossible to remove the
key from the ignition switch. To remove
the key, turn it to ON and then to OFF
with the car stopped without forcing at re-
moval.
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 130
PARKING THE CAR
Proceed as follows:
Stop the engine and engage the hand-
brake;
Engage a gear (on a slope, engage first
gear if the car is faced uphill or reverse
if it is faced downhill; position P with
automatic transmission) and leave the
wheels steered.
Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone
if the car is parked on a steep slope. Do
not leave the key in the ignition switch to
prevent draining the battery. Always re-
move the key when you leave the car.
Never leave children unattended in the
car. Always remove the ignition key when
leaving the car and take it out with you.
HANDBRAKE fig. 3
The handbrake lever is located between
the two front seats.
Pull the handbrake lever upwards until the
car cannot be moved. Four or five clicks
are generally enough when the car is on
level ground while nine or ten may be re-
quired if the car is on a steep slope or
laden.
IMPORTANT If this is not the case, con-
tact Fiat Dealership to have the handbrake
adjusted.
When the handbrake lever is pulled up
and the ignition key is at ON the instru-
ment panel warning light
x
will come on.
IMPORTANT If after turning the engine
off with the car stopped, it is not possi-
ble to remove the key from the ignition
switch, try to turn it to ON and then to
OFF. If the problem persists, remove the
emergency key without forcing and fit it
into the proper slot A-fig. 2 in the igni-
tion switch; now it will be possible to turn
the key to OFF and remove it. Contact
Fiat Dealership.
WARNING If you turn the electronic key
to OFF position, external lights and elec-
tronic safety systems are turned off.
131
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
fig. 2
FF0L0207m
fig. 3
F0L0373m
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 131
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
To engage the gears, press the clutch ped-
al fully and shift the gear lever into one of
the required positions (the diagram is
shown on the knob).
IMPORTANT The car can only be put in-
to reverse gear when it has stopped mov-
ing completely. With the engine running,
before engaging the reverse, wait at least
2 seconds with the clutch pedal fully down
to prevent damage and grating of the
gears.
To engage reverse (R) from neutral pro-
ceed as follows:
Petrol versions fig. 4
shift the lever to the right and then
back;
Multijet versions fig. 5
lift the sliding ring A under the knob
and shift the lever straight to the left
and then forward.
To release the handbrake:
slightly lift the handbrake and press re-
lease button A;
keep button A pressed and lower the
lever. Warning light
x
will turn off.
Press the brake pedal when carrying out
this operation to prevent the car from
moving accidentally.
132
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
fig. 4
FF0L0146m
fig. 5
F0L0200m
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 132
ELECTRONIC
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
The car may be fitted with 5-speed (petrol
versions) or 6-speed (Multijet versions)
automatic transmission with electronic
control. Gears are shifted automatically
according to instant car parameters of use
(speed and accelerator pedal position).
Gears can however be shifted manually us-
ing transmission in sequential mode.
IMPORTANT Read carefully the follow-
ing points to learn how to use the elec-
tronic automatic transmission right from
the start.
GEAR LEVER fig. 6
P Parking
R Reverse
N Idle
D Drive, automatic forward gear
+ To upshift in sequential mode
To downshift in sequential mode
133
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
To change gears properly
you must push the clutch
pedal fully down. It is therefore es-
sential that there is nothing under the
pedals: make sure mats are lying flat
and do not get in the way of the ped-
als.
WARNING
Do not drive with your hand
resting on the gear lever as the
force exerted, even if slight,
could lead over time to pre-
mature wear on the gearbox internal
components.
IMPORTANT The clutch pedal must be
used for gear shift only. Never drive with
the foot resting, even if slightly, on the
clutch pedal. For versions / markets where
applicable, the clutch pedal control elec-
tronics can intervene interpreting the
wrong drive style as a fault
fig. 6
FF0L0315m
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 133
Reverse (R)
With gear lever at R, it is not possible to
start the engine.
Idle (N)
This position corresponds to the idle po-
sition of a traditional manual gearbox.
With gear lever at N, it is possible to start
the engine.
Engage idle N in case of long stops.
Drive, automatic forward gear (D)
Engage position D for urban and extra-ur-
ban use of the car.
DISPLAY
The display shows:
selected gear (P, R, N, D) and word-
ing AUTO, in automatic mode;
upshifting or downshifting (through
digits) in sequential mode.
GEAR LEVER POSITIONS
Parking (P)
Select P to stop mechanically the driving
wheels.
Engage this position only with the car sta-
tionary, pull the handbrake if required.
134
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
To shift from P to whatever
position, with ignition key at
ON, press the brake pedal and
press the gear lever button.
Reverse shall only be engaged
with car stationary, engine
idling and accelerator fully re-
leased.
Shifting from R N or D is free
whereas for shifting R P you
have to press the gear lever
button.
To shift from N, release the ac-
celerator pedal and make sure
the engine is idling.
Shifting from N D is free
whereas for shifting from N
R or P you have to press the
gear lever button.
Shifting the lever from P to D
(P D), from N to D
(N D) and from R to D (R
D) shall be only performed
with the car stationary and the engine
idling.
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 134
Proceed as follows:
Set gear lever to N and press the
brake pedal
Restart the engine by turning the key
to START and set the gear lever to
D.
IMPORTANT: Take the utmost care in
the following conditions: handbrake and
brake pedal released with engine idling and
gear lever at D, R or sequential since the
car can move also without pressing the ac-
celerator pedal.
The above condition can be used for park-
ing in narrow spaces, taking care to op-
erate the brake pedal only.
ENGINE STARTING
Handbrake engaged and gear lever at
P or N: engine can be only started with
the gear lever in one of these posi-
tions.
With lever at P press the brake pedal
and turn the ignition key to START
without pressing the accelerator ped-
al.
With lever at N press the brake ped-
al and turn the ignition key to START
without pressing the accelerator ped-
al.
If the engine fails to start at first attempt,
turn the key to OFF before trying to
restart.
IMPORTANT With engine off, never leave
the ignition key at ON to prevent drain-
ing the battery.
IMPORTANT: if when travelling
with gear lever at D or in sequential
mode you turn inadvertently the key
to OFF the engine will turn off and
transmission will fail.
135
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Running the engine in con-
fined areas is extremely dan-
gerous. The engine consumes oxygen
and produces carbon monoxide
which is a highly toxic and lethal gas.
WARNING
MOVING OFF
Proceed as follows:
at P position, press the brake pedal;
press the gear lever button and move
the gear lever to the required position
(D or R);
accelerate gradually; the car moves off
and gearshifting will be automatic.
Never leave children unat-
tended in the car.
WARNING
Shifting from P, with ignition
key at ON, is only possible
with brake pedal pressed.
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 135
When stopping the car with a gear high-
er than 1st gear, transmission will set au-
tomatically at 1st gear.
When stopping the car under poor grip
conditions (snow, ice), at next starting the
transmission control unit could engage a
gear higher than 1st gear to prevent wheel
slipping. This shall not be considered as a
fault
IMPORTANT: in the event of excessive
oil temperatures (see section “Warning
lights and messages”), the electronic con-
trol intervenes excluding sequential mode
and activating automatic mode in order to
safeguard transmission life. Sequential
mode will be resumed as soon as regular
operating temperatures are restored.
AUTOMATIC MODE
D can be selected from sequential mode
under whatever driving condition.
When passing from sequential mode to D,
the gear to engage is selected by trans-
mission control unit according to engine
rpm and speed (accelerator pedal posi-
tion).
Low engine power demand will result in
long gears engagement and reduced fuel
consumption. Increasing speed by press-
ing the accelerator will automatically en-
gage short gears that will result in im-
proved performance as to pickup and ac-
celeration: in this case fuel consumption
will increase.
For speedy pickup:
press the accelerator pedal flat-out,
the kick-down device will cut in to ob-
tain max. performance in terms of
pickup and acceleration. In this case fu-
el consumption will obviously increase.
IMPORTANT When driving under poor
grip conditions (snow, ice, etc.) avoid to
engage the kick-down device.
SEQUENTIAL MODE
In sequential mode, the electronic auto-
matic transmission works like a fixed gear
sequential gearbox.
From position D move the gear lever left-
wards:
move gear lever to +: to upshift;
move gear lever to –: to downshift.
Gears are displayed by digits on the in-
strument panel. Non-stop monitoring car-
ried out by transmission control unit ex-
cludes whatever possibility of error.
Downshifting (or upshifting) is only pos-
sible if engine rpm enables it.
In sequential mode, electronic transmis-
sion control can however intervene in self-
adapting mode by shifting gears automat-
ically when engine rpm exceeds or falls be-
low the admitted rpm limit.
136
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:32 Pagina 136
PARKING THE CAR
Engage the handbrake and set gear lever to
P. Leave the wheels steered. Block the
wheels with a wedge or a stone if the car
is parked on a steep slope.
Do not leave the ignition key at ON to
prevent draining the battery. Always re-
move the key when you leave the car.
TOWING THE CAR
IMPORTANT Comply with current local
regulations to tow the car.
If the car is to be towed, observe the fol-
lowing recommendations:
transport the car, if possible, on the
flatbed of a wrecker or maintenance
vehicle;
should this not be possible, tow the
car with the front driving wheels
raised from ground.
For towing the car, the gear lever shall be
set to N.
FAILURE INDICATIONS
Failures to the electronic automatic trans-
mission is indicated by the turning of warn-
ing light
t
on the instrument panel to-
gether with the dedicated message on the
multifunction display (see section “Warn-
ing lights and messages”).
Contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possi-
ble to have the fault removed.
STOPPING THE CAR
To stop the car:
release the accelerator pedal;
press the brake pedal.
IMPORTANT With the car on a sloping
road and engine running, keep the car
stopped just using the brake pedal, do not
press the accelerator pedal.
With the car parked with engine running
and gear lever at D, R or in sequential
mode, keep the brake pedal pressed to
prevent car moving off by engine idling.
For long stops set gear lever to P.
137
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Never leave children unat-
tended in the car.
WARNING
BUZZER WARNINGS
The warning buzzer will sound and P po-
sition will flash for a few seconds when the
ignition key is at OFF and the gear lever
is not set at P.
Ignition key can only be removed with
gear lever at P.
Do not start the engine when
towing the car.
Failure to observe the above
instructions could seriously
damage the automatic trans-
mission.
Never leave children unat-
tended in the car.
WARNING
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:33 Pagina 137
Roof rack/ski rack
Remove the roof rack or the ski rack from
the roof as soon as they are no longer
used. These accessories lower air pene-
tration and adversely affect consumption
levels. When needing to carry particular-
ly voluminous objects, preferably use a
trailer.
Electric devices
Use electric devices only for the amount
of time needed. Rear heated window, ad-
ditional headlights, windscreen wipers and
heater fan need a considerable amount of
energy, therefore increasing the require-
ment of current increases fuel consump-
tion (up to +25% in the urban cycle).
Climate control
The air conditioner is an additional load
which greatly affects the engine leading to
higher consumption (on average up to
+20%). When the temperature outside
the car permits it, use the air vents where
possible.
Spoilers
The use of non-certified aerodynamic
items may adversely affect air drag and
consumption levels.
DRIVING STYLE
Starting
Do not warm the engine with the car at
a standstill or at idle or high speed: under
these conditions the engine warms up
much more slowly, increasing electrical
consumption and emissions. It is therefore
advisable to move off immediately, slow-
ly, avoiding high speeds. This way the en-
gine will warm faster.
Unnecessary actions
Avoid accelerating when waiting at traffic
lights or before switching off the engine.
This and also double declutching is ab-
solutely pointless on modern cars and al-
so increase consumption and pollution.
Gear selection
As soon as the conditions of the traffic and
road allow, use a higher gear. Using a low
gear to obtain brilliant performance in-
creases consumption.
In the same way improper use of a high
gear increases consumption, emissions an
engine wear.
CONTAINING
RUNNING COSTS
Here are some suggestions which may
help you to keep the running costs of your
car down and lower the amount of toxic
emissions released into the atmosphere.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Car maintenance
Have checks and adjustments carried out
in accordance with the “Service schedule”.
Tyres
Check the pressure of the tyres routine-
ly at an interval of no more than 4 weeks:
if the pressure is too low, consumption
levels increase as resistance to rolling is
higher.
Unnecessary loads
Do not travel with too much luggage
stowed in the boot. The weight of the car
(especially when driving in town) and its
trim greatly affects consumption and sta-
bility.
138
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:33 Pagina 138
Traffic situations and road
conditions
Rather high consumption levels are tied to
situations with heavy traffic, for example
in queues with frequent use of the lower
gears or in cities with many traffic lights.
Also winding mountain roads and rough
road surfaces adversely affect consump-
tion.
Traffic hold-ups
During prolonged hold-ups (e.g.: level
crossings) the engine should be switched
off.
TOWING TRAILERS
IMPORTANT NOTES
For towing caravans or trailers the car
must be fitted with a certified tow hook
and an adequate electric system. Installa-
tion should be carried out by specialised
personnel who release a special document
for circulation on the road.
Install any specific and/or additional rear-
view mirrors as specified by law.
Remember that when towing a trailer,
steep hills are harder to climb, the brak-
ing spaces increase and overtaking takes
longer depending on the overall weight.
Engage a low gear when driving downhill,
rather than constantly using the brake.
The weight the trailer exerts on the car
tow hook reduces by the same amount
the actual car loading capacity. To make
sure the maximum towable weight is not
exceeded (given in the log book) account
should be taken of the fully laden trailer,
including accessories and personal be-
longings.
Top speed
Fuel consumption considerably increases
with speed. Avoid superfluous braking and
accelerating, which cost in terms of both
fuel and emissions.
Acceleration
Accelerating violently increasing the revs
will greatly affect consumption and emis-
sions: acceleration should be gradual and
should not exceed the maximum torque.
CONDITIONS OF USE
Cold starting
Short journeys and frequent cold starts do
not allow the engine to reach optimum
operating temperature. This results in a
significant increase in consumption levels
(from +15 to +30% on the urban cycle)
and emission of harmful substances.
139
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:33 Pagina 139
INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK
The towing device should be fastened to
the body by specialised personnel accord-
ing to any additional and/or integrative in-
formation supplied by the Manufacturer of
the device.
The towing device must meet current reg-
ulations with reference to 94/20/EC Di-
rective and subsequent amendments.
For any version the towing device used
must match the towable weight of the car
on which it is to be installed.
For the electric connection a unified con-
nector should be used which is generally
placed on a special bracket normally fas-
tened to the towing device, and a special
ECU for external trailer light control shall
be installed on the car.
For the electrical connection, 7 or 13 pin
12VDC connection is to be used (CU-
NA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards). Follow
the instructions provided by the car man-
ufacturer and/or the tow hitch manufac-
turer.
An electric brake should be supplied di-
rectly by the battery through a cable with
a cross section of no less than
2.5 mm
2
.
IMPORTANT Electric brake or other de-
vice shall be used with running engine.
In addition to the electrical branches, the
car’s electric system can only be con-
nected to the supply cable for an electric
brake and to the cable for an internal light,
though not above 15W.
For connections use the preset control
unit with battery cable no less than 2.5
mm
2
.
Do not exceed the speed limits of the
country you are driving in. In any case do
not exceed 100 km/h.
It is recommended to use a proper tow-
ing stabiliser on the trailer drawbar.
140
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
The ABS system with which
the car may be fitted does
not control the trailer braking system.
Drive with extreme care on slippery
roadbeds.
WARNING
Under no circumstances
should the car brake system
be altered to control the trailer brake.
The trailer braking system must be
fully independent of the car hydraulic
system.
WARNING
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:33 Pagina 140
ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM fig. 7
The tow hook structure must be fastened using a total of 4 M10 screws
(A).
Thickness of upper plates, left B and right C, shall be 6 mm min.
Thickness of lower plates, left E and right F, shall be 8 mm min.
The hook should be fastened to the body avoiding any type of drilling
and trimming of the rear bumpers that remains visible when the hook
is removed.
IMPORTANT It is compulsory to fasten a label (plainly visible) of suit-
able size and material with the following wording:
MAX LOAD ON BALL 70 kg
After fitting, screw holes shall be sealed to prevent exhaust gas inlet.
141
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
fig. 7
FF0L0236m
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:33 Pagina 141
IMPORTANT When snow tyres are used
with a max speed index below the one
that can be reached by the car (increased
by 5%), place a notice in the passenger’s
compartment, plainly in the driver’s view
which states the max permissible speed of
the snow tyres (as per EC Directive).
All four tyres should be the same (brand
and track) to ensure greater safety when
driving and braking and better driveabili-
ty.
Remember that it is inappropriate to
change the direction of rotation of tyres.
SNOW TYRES
Use snow tyres of the same size as the
normal tyres provided with the car.
Fiat Dealership will be happy to provide
advice concerning the most suitable type
of tyre for the customer’s requirements.
For the type of tyre to be used, inflation
pressures and the specifications of snow
tyres, follow the instructions given in para-
graph “Wheels” in section “Technical
specifications”.
The winter features of these tyres are re-
duced considerably when the tread depth
is below 4 mm. In this case, they should
be replaced.
Due to the snow tyre features, under nor-
mal conditions of use or on long motor-
way journeys, the performance of these
tyres is lower than that of normal tyres. It
is therefore necessary to limit their use to
the purposes for which they are certified.
142
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
The max speed for snow
tyres with “Q” marking is
160 km/h; 190 km/h for tyres with “T”
marking and 210 km/h for tyres with
H marking. The Road Traffic Code
speed limits must however be always
strictly observed.
WARNING
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:33 Pagina 142
SNOW CHAINS
Use of snow chains should be in compli-
ance with local regulations.
Snow chains should only be applied to the
driving wheels (front wheels). We rec-
ommend using Lineaccessori Fiat snow
chains.
Check the tension of the chains after the
first few metres have been driven.
IMPORTANT Snow chains cannot be fit-
ted to the space-saver spare wheel. So, if
a front (drive) wheel is punctured and
chains are needed, a rear wheel should be
fitted to the front of the car and the spare
wheel should be fitted to the rear. This
way with two normal drive wheels, snow
chains can be fitted to them to solve an
emergency.
IMPORTANT Snow chains shall only be
a temporary solution. Use snow tyres if
you have to travel for long on roadbeds
covered with snow or ice.
IMPORTANT With snow chains fitted,
use the accelerator with extreme care to
prevent or to reduce to a minimum dri-
ving wheel skidding in order to avoid snow
chain breaking that could cause damages
to the body or the mechanical parts of the
car.
143
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Versions Tyres on which chains Type of snow chains
can be fitted to be used
1.8 - 2.2 205/55 R16 91V
1.9 Multijet
215/55 R16 93W
2.4 Multijet
215/50 R17 91W
Snow chains with reduced size with
max protrusion beyond the tyre
profile of 9 mm
Refer to the above mentioned table for information on the wheels where
snow chains can be fitted. Follow the prescriptions.
Keep your speed down when snow chains are fitted. Do not ex-
ceed 40 km/h. Avoid potholes, steps and pavements and avoid
also to drive for long distances on roads not covered with snow
to prevent damaging the car and the roadbed.
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:33 Pagina 143
clean and protect the painted parts us-
ing protective wax;
clean and protect the shiny metal parts
using special compounds readily avail-
able;
sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber
windscreen and rear window wiper
blades and lift them off the glass;
slightly open the windows;
cover the car with a cloth or perfo-
rated plastic sheet. Do not use sheets
of non-perforated plastic as they do
not allow moisture on the car body to
evaporate;
inflate tyres to +0,5 bar above the
normal specified pressure and check it
at intervals;
when the battery is not disconnected
from the electric system, if the vehicle
is equipped with a battery with an op-
tical indicator, control its charge sta-
tus every 30 days and if the optical in-
dicator shows a dark colour without
the central green zone, recharge it;
do not drain the engine cooling sys-
tem.
IMPORTANT Where relevant, switch off
the car alarm with the remote control.
CAR INACTIVITY
If the car is to be left inactive for longer
than a month, the following precautions
should be noted:
park the car in covered, dry and if pos-
sible well-ventilated premises;
engage a gear (position P with auto-
matic transmission);
check that the handbrake is not en-
gaged;
disconnect battery terminals (first dis-
connect the negative terminal);
if the vehicle is equipped with a bat-
tery with an optical indicator, control
its charge status. This check is to be
repeated every three months when
the car is left inactive. Recharge if the
optical indicator shows a dark colour
without the central green area;
144
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 16:33 Pagina 144
145
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
GENERAL WARNINGS...................................................... 146
INSUFFICIENT BRAKE LIQUID ....................................... 146
HAND BRAKE ENGAGED ............................................... 146
AIR BAG FAILURE................................................................ 146
PASSENGER SIDE FRONT AND SIDE CHEST
PROTECTION AIR BAGS (SIDE BAGS) OFF ............... 147
SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED ......................................... 147
EXCESSIVE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE ..... 148
INSUFFICIENT BATTERY RECHARGING .................... 148
ABS SYSTEM FAILURE ........................................................ 148
EBD FAILURE......................................................................... 148
INSUFFICIENT ENGINE OIL PRESSURE........................ 149
DEGRADED OIL................................................................... 149
POWER STEERING FAILURE ........................................... 149
INCOMPLETE DOOR CLOSURE.................................... 149
INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE ......................................... 149
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE (EOBD) ........ 149
FUEL RESERVE ..................................................................... 150
SPARK PLUG PREHEATING ............................................. 150
SPARK PLUG PREHEATING FAILURE........................... 150
WATER IN DIESEL FILTER................................................ 151
FIAT CODE - VEHICLE PROTECTION
SYSTEM FAILURE ................................................................ 151
ALARM FAILURE .................................................................. 151
BREAK-IN ATTEMPT .......................................................... 151
ELECTRONIC KEY NOT RECOGNISED ..................... 151
EXTERIOR LIGHT FAILURE.............................................. 152
REAR FOG LIGHTS ............................................................. 152
GENERIC SIGNALLING ..................................................... 152
ESP SYSTEM FAILURE ......................................................... 154
HILL HOLDER FAILURE .................................................... 154
POSITION LIGHTS AND LOW BEAMS........................ 154
FOLLOW ME HOME........................................................... 154
FOG LIGHTS ......................................................................... 154
LEFT TURN SIGNAL ........................................................... 154
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL ....................................................... 154
HIGH BEAMS......................................................................... 155
POSSIBILITY OF ICE ON ROADS................................... 155
LIMITED RANGE .................................................................. 155
ASR SYSTEM .......................................................................... 155
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILURE ..................... 155
MAXIMUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL
TEMPERATURE .................................................................... 155
SET SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDANCE.................................... 156
CONSTANT SPEED REGULATOR
(CRUISE CONTROL).......................................................... 156
BRAKE PAD WEAR ............................................................. 156
MINIMUM ENGINE OIL LEVEL ....................................... 156
REAR SIDE CHEST PROTECTION AIR BAGS
(REAR SIDE BAGS) OFF ..................................................... 156
TURNING OFF A MOVING VEHICLE........................... 156
STARTING PROCEDURE DISPLAY INFORMATION
MESSAGES (AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)............... 156
STARTING PROCEDURE DISPLAY INFORMATION
MESSAGES (MANUAL TRANSMISSION) ...................... 156
WW
W
A
A
R
R
N
N
I
I
N
N
G
G
L
L
I
I
G
G
H
H
T
T
S
S
A
A
N
N
D
D
M
M
E
E
S
S
S
S
A
A
G
G
EE
E
S
S
145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 15:18 Pagina 145
146
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
GENERAL WARNINGS
Turning on of warning light is accompa-
nied by specific message and/or by buzzer
sound where provided by instrument pan-
el. These indications are concise and
cautionary and shall not be considered
as exhaustive and/or as an alternative to
the specifications contained in this Own-
er Handbook which shall always be read
through carefully and thoroughly. In case
of failure indication always refer to the
specifications contained in this sec-
tion.
IMPORTANT Failure indications displayed
are divided into two categories: very se-
rious and less serious failures.
Very serious failures are indicated by a
warning “cycle” repeated until failure is
eliminated.
Less serious failures are indicated by a lim-
ited warning “cycle”.
The warning cycle of both failure classes
can be stopped by pressing button
MODE. The instrument panel warning
light will stay on until eliminating the fault.
As concerns messages relevant to the ver-
sions equipped with Dualogic gearbox, see
the attached Supplement.
LOW BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL (red)
HANDBRAKE ON (red)
Turning the ignition key to ON the warn-
ing light turns on, but it should go off af-
ter few seconds.
Low brake fluid level
The warning light turns on when the lev-
el of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls
below the minimum level, due to possi-
ble leak in the circuit.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
x
If the warning light
x
turns
on when travelling (on cer-
tain versions together with the mes-
sage on the display) stop the car im-
mediately and contact Fiat Dealer-
ship.
WARNING
Handbrake on
The warning light turns on when the hand-
brake is on.
On certain versions, if the car is moving
the buzzer will also sound.
IMPORTANT If the warning light turns on
when travelling, check that the handbrake
is not engaged.
AIR BAG FAILURE
(red)
Turning the ignition key to ON
the warning light turns on, but it should go
off after few seconds.
The warning light stays on glowing steadi-
ly if there is a failure in the air bag system.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
¬
145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 15:18 Pagina 146
147
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
If when turning the ignition
key to ON, the warning light
¬ does not turn on or stays on when
travelling there could be a failure in
safety systems; in this event air bags
or pretensioners could not trigger in
case of impact or, in a minor num-
ber of cases, they could trigger acci-
dentally. Contact Fiat Dealership im-
mediately to have the system
checked.
WARNING
The failure of the ¬warning
light is also indicated by the
flashing for more than the normal 4
seconds of the passenger’s front air
bag deactivated warning light
F
.
In addition the air bag system will de-
activate automatically the passen-
ger’s air bags (front and side where
provided). In this event, warning light
¬ could not indicate safety systems
failures. Contact Fiat Dealership im-
mediately to have the system
checked.
WARNING
PASSENGER SIDE
FRONT AND SIDE
CHEST PROTECTION
AIR BAGS (side bags)
OFF (amber yellow)
Warning light
F
will come on when de-
activating the passenger front air bag and
side bag (where provided). With passen-
ger front air bag active, turning the igni-
tion key to ON, warning light
F
will
turn on with fixed light for about 4 sec-
onds and then it will flash for other 4 sec-
onds. It shall then go off.
F
The failure of the warning
light
F
is indicated by the
turning on of warning light ¬. In ad-
dition the air bag system will deacti-
vate automatically the passenger’s air
bags (front and side where provided).
Contact Fiat Dealership immediately
to have the system checked.
WARNING
SEAT BELTS
NOT FASTENED
The warning light on the dial
turns on glowing steadily with car
stationary and driver’s seat belt not fas-
tened correctly. The warning light will turn
on flashing together with the buzzer when,
with car moving, front seat belts are not
fastened correctly. The S.B.R. (Seat Belt Re-
minder) buzzer can only be excluded by Fi-
at Dealership. The system can be reacti-
vated through the set-up menu (see dia-
gram aside). The display will show the ded-
icated message.
<
145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 15:18 Pagina 147
148
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Car heavy duty (e.g.: towing trailer
uphill of fully laden car): decrease
speed, if the warning light stays on,
stop the car. Wait for 2 or 3 minutes
leaving the engine on and slightly ac-
celerated to further activate the cir-
culation of the coolant fluid, then
switch the engine off. Check proper
coolant level as described previously.
IMPORTANT Under severe use of the
car, keep the engine on and slightly accel-
erated for few minutes before switching it
off.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
LOW BATTERY
CHARGE (red)
(where provided)
Turning the key to ON the warning
light turns on, but it should go out as
soon as the engine is started (with the
engine running at idle speed a brief
delay in going out is allowed).
If the warning light stays on contact im-
mediately Fiat Dealership.
w
INEFFICIENT ABS
SYSTEM (amber)
Turning the key to ON the
warning light turns on, but it should go off
after few seconds.
The warning light turns on when the sys-
tem is inefficient or unavailable. In this case
the braking system keeps its effectiveness
unchanged, but without the potential of-
fered by the ABS system. Caution is ad-
visable and it is necessary to contact Fiat
Dealership.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
>
INEFFICIENT
EBD
ELECTRONIC
BRAKING
DISTRIBUTOR (red) (amber)
The turning on at the same time of warn-
ing lights
x
and
>
with the engine run-
ning indicates an EBD system failure or
that the system is unavailable; in this case
heavy braking may cause the rear wheels
to lock before time, with the possibility of
skidding. Drive with the utmost care to
the nearest Fiat Dealership to have the
system checked.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
x
>
HIGH TEMPERATURE
ENGINE COOLANT
FLUID (red)
Turning the ignition key to ON the warn-
ing light turns on, but it should go off af-
ter few seconds.
The warning light turns on when the en-
gine is overheated.
If the warning light comes on when dri-
ving, proceed as follows:
normal driving conditions: stop
the car, switch off the engine and
check whether the water level in the
reservoir is not below the MIN mark.
Otherwise wait for few seconds to al-
low the engine cooling, then open
slowly and carefully the cap, top up
coolant and check whether its level is
falling between MIN and MAX marks
in the reservoir. Check visually any
leak. If, when restarting, the warning
light comes on again, contact a Fiat
Dealership.
ç
145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 15:18 Pagina 148
EXHAUST OIL
(Multijet versions)
The warning light with turn on
flashing together with the mes-
sage on the display when the system de-
tects that the engine oil is exhaust.
After the first indication, at each engine
starting the warning light
v
will go on
flashing for 60 seconds and then for 2
hours until oil is changed.
If warning light
v
flashes,
contact Fiat Dealership im-
mediately to have oil changed
and instrument panel warning light
turned off.
149
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
LOW ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE (red)
Turning the ignition key to ON
the warning light turns on, but it
should go off after few seconds.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
v
v
If the warning light
v
turns on when travelling to-
gether with the message on the dis-
play, stop the engine immediately
and contact a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
INJECTION SYSTEM
FAILURE
(Multijet versions - red)
EOBD ENGINE
CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE
(petrol versions - amber)
Injection system failure
Turning the ignition key to ON the warn-
ing light turns on, but it should go off af-
ter few seconds.
If the warning light stays on or turns on
when travelling, means a fault in the sup-
ply/ignition system which could cause high
emissions at the exhaust, possible lack of
performance, poor handling and high con-
sumption levels.
On certain versions the dedicated message
is displayed.
In these conditions it is possible to con-
tinue driving without however requiring
heavy effort or high speed from the en-
gine. In any case, contact Fiat Dealership
as soon as possible.
EOBD ENGINE CONTROL
SYSTEM FAILURE
Under normal conditions, turning the ig-
nition key to ON, the warning light turns
on, but it should go off when the engine has
started. In this case, turning on indicates
proper working of the warning light. If the
U
INCOMPLETE DOOR
LOCKING (red)
(where provided)
The warning light turns on when
one or more doors, the boot or the bon-
net are not properly shut. The dedicated
message will be displayed.
When travelling with door/doors, boot or
bonnet open also a buzzer will sound.
´
POWER STEERING
FAILURE (red)
(where provided)
Turning the ignition key to ON the warn-
ing light turns on, but it should go off af-
ter few seconds. If the warning light stays
on, you will not have steering assistance
and the effort on the steering wheel will
be increased, steering is however possi-
ble. Contact Fiat Dealership. The dedicat-
ed message will be displayed.
g
145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 15:18 Pagina 149
150
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
If when turning ignition key at
ON, the warning light
U
does not turn on or if it turns
on with fixed light or flashing
(on certain versions together with the
message on the display) when the car
is travelling, contact Fiat Dealership as
soon as possible. Warning light
U
op-
eration can by checked by traffic
agents by proper equipment therefore,
comply with laws and regulations in
force in the country where you are dri-
ving.
ç
FUEL RESERVE
(amber)
Turning the ignition key to ON
the warning light comes on but shall go off
after few seconds.
The warning light turns on when about 5
litres fuel are left in the tank.
IMPORTANT The warning light flashes to
indicate a failure, contact Fiat Dealership
as soon as possible to have the system
checked.
GLOW PLUG
WARMING
(Multijet versions -
amber)
GLOW PLUG WARMING
FAILURE
(Multijet versions - amber)
Glow plug warming
Turning the ignition key to ON the warn-
ing light turns on and it will go off when
glow plugs reach the preset temperature.
Start the engine immediately after warn-
ing light turning off.
IMPORTANT With hot ambient temper-
ature, warning light stays on for very short
time.
Glow plug warming failure
The warning light turns on when there is
a failure in the glow plug warming system.
Contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possi-
ble.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
m
warning light stays on or turns on when
travelling:
glowing steadily: means a fault in the
supply/ignition system which could
cause high emissions at the exhaust,
possible lack of performance, poor
handling and high consumption levels.
On certain versions the dedicated mes-
sage is displayed.
In these conditions it is possible to con-
tinue driving without however requiring
heavy effort or high speed from the en-
gine. Prolonged use of the car with the
warning light on may cause damages. Con-
tact Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
The warning light goes off if the fault dis-
appears, but it is still stored by the system.
flashing: indicates the possibility of
damage to the catalyst (see “EOBD
system” in section “Dashboard and
controls”).
If the light flashes, it is necessary to release
the accelerator pedal to lower the speed
of the engine until the warning light stops
flashing; continue the journey at moder-
ate speed, trying to avoid driving condi-
tions that may cause further flashing and
contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possi-
ble.
145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 15:18 Pagina 150
151
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WATER IN DIESEL
FUEL FILTER
(Multijet versions -
amber)
Turning the ignition key to ON the warn-
ing light turns on, but it should go off af-
ter few seconds.
The warning light
c
turns on when there
is water in the diesel fuel filter. On certain
versions warning light
è
will turn on.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
c
The presence of water in the
fuel circuit may cause serious
damage to the entire injec-
tion system and cause irreg-
ular engine operation. If the warning
light
c
turns on (on certain versions to-
gether with the message on the display)
contact Fiat Dealership as soon as pos-
sible to have the system relieved. If the
above indications come on immedi-
ately after refuelling, water has prob-
ably been poured into the tank: turn
the engine off immediately and contact
Fiat Dealership.
CAR PROTECTION
SYSTEM FAILURE -
FIAT CODE
(amber)
(where provided)
Turning the key to ON the warning
light shall flash only once and then go
off.
If with the ignition key at ON the warn-
ing light comes on with fixed light, this in-
dicates a possible failure (see “The Fiat
Code system” in section “Dashboard and
controls”).
IMPORTANT The turning on at the same
time of the
U
and Y warning lights in-
dicates a failure of the Fiat CODE system.
If with the engine running the warning light
Y
flashes, this means that the car is not
protected by the engine inhibitor device
(see “Fiat Code system” in section “Dash-
board and controls”).
Contact Fiat Dealership to have all the
keys memorised.
ALARM FAILURE
(where provided)
The turning on of the warning
light (together with the message
on the display and the buzzer) indicates
that there is a failure in the electronic
alarm system. Contact Fiat Dealership as
soon as possible.
Y Y
BREAK-IN ATTEMPT
(where provided)
The turning on of the warning
light (together with the message
on the display), indicates an attempt of
break-in.
ELECTRONIC KEY NOT
RECOGNISED
(where provided)
The turning on of the warning
light (together with the message on the
display and the buzzer) indicates that the
electronic key being used is not enabled.
Y
Y
145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 15:18 Pagina 151
Warning light
v
turns on
together with the dedicated
message on the display to in-
dicate that the cleaning pro-
cedure cannot be performed, contact
Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
152
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
GENERIC FAILURE
INDICATION
(amber)
The warning light turns on in the follow-
ing circumstances.
Engine oil pressure
sensor failure
The warning light comes on when the en-
gine oil pressure sensor is faulty. Contact
Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
è
EXTERNAL LIGHT
FAILURE (amber)
The warning light turns on
when one of the following lights is failing:
– side/taillights
– brake lights (third brake light excluded)
– rear fog lights
– direction indicators
– number plate lights.
The failure referring to these lights could
be: one or more blown bulbs, a blown
protection fuse or an electric connection
cut-off.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
W
REAR FOG LIGHTS
(amber)
The warning light turns on
when the rear fog lights are turned on.
4
Diesel particulate filter clogged
(Multijet versions)
The warning light turns on together with
the message on the display and the buzzer
when the diesel particulate filter is clogged
and the driving conditions do not enable
to activate automatically the reclaiming
procedure.
To enable the cleaning procedure, keep
the car running until the warning light
turns off.
Inertial fuel cut-off switch
intervened
The warning light turns on together with
the message on the display, when the in-
ertial fuel cut-off switch is triggered.
To reset the fuel cut-off switch, see para-
graph “Power and fuel cut-off switch” in
section “Dashboard and controls”.
Rain sensor failure
The warning light on the dial turns on (on
certain versions together with the mes-
sage on the display) when the rain sensor
is faulty. Contact Fiat Dealership.
145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 15:18 Pagina 152
153
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Parking sensor failure
(where provided)
The warning light on the dial turns on to-
gether with the message on the display
when failure is detected in parking sensors.
Contact Fiat Dealership.
Antipinch system failure
(where provided)
The warning light on the dial turns on to-
gether with the message on the display
when failure is detected in the antipinch
system.
Contact Fiat Dealership.
Twilight sensor failure
(where provided)
The warning light on the dial turns on (to-
gether with the message on the display)
when failure is detected in twilight sen-
sor (adjusting headlight sensitivity).
Check tyre pressure
(where provided)
Warning light in the panel comes on (to-
gether with the message in the display)
when the tyre inflation pressure is too
low.
In this case, inflate tyres to the specified
pressure values (see paragraph “Inflating
pressures” in section “Technical Specifi-
cations”).
Flat tyres (where provided)
The warning light on the dial turns on (to-
gether with message on the display and
the buzzer), when there is a pressure drop
in one or more tyres. In this way the
T.P.M.S. system warns the driver that one
or more tyre/s is/are flat (i.e. punctured).
IMPORTANT Stop travelling with one or
more flat tyre/s since road holding could
be jeopardised. Stop the car without brak-
ing or steering sharply. Change immedi-
ately punctured wheel with space-saver
spare wheel (where provided - see sec-
tion “In an emergency”) and contact Fiat
Dealership as soon as possible.
Tyre pressure monitoring system
failure (where provided)
The warning light on the dial turns on (to-
gether with the message on the display)
when a failure is detected in the T.P.M.S.
system (where provided).
Contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possi-
ble.
Should one or more wheels without sen-
sor be fitted, the instrument panel warn-
ing light will come on (together with the
message on the display) and stay on until
fitting again the four wheels with sensors.
145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 15:18 Pagina 153
154
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
(green)
The warning light turns on
when the front fog lights are turned on.
5
LEFT-HAND
DIRECTION
INDICATOR (green -
intermittent)
The warning light turns on when the di-
rection indicator control lever is moved
downwards or, together with the right in-
dicator, when the hazard warning light
button is pressed.
F
RIGHT-HAND
DIRECTION
INDICATOR (green -
intermittent)
The warning light turns on when the di-
rection indicator control lever is moved
upwards or, together with the left indica-
tor, when the hazard warning light button
is pressed.
D
ESP SYSTEM FAILURE
(amber)
Turning the ignition key to ON
the warning light comes on but shall go off
after few seconds.
If the warning light does not go off or stays
on when travelling together with the but-
ton led ASR OFF, contact Fiat Dealer-
ship.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
Note Warning light flashing when driving
indicates that the ESP system is active.
á
SIDE/TAILLIGHTS
AND LOW BEAMS
(green)
FOLLOW ME HOME
(green)
Side/taillights and low beams
The warning light turns on when side/tail-
lights or low beams are turned on.
Follow me home
The warning light will turn when this de-
vice is active (see “Follow me home” in
section “Dashboard and controls”).
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
3
HILL HOLDER FAILURE
(amber)
Turning the ignition key to ON
the warning light comes on but shall go off
after few seconds.
The warning light will turn on when the
Hill Holder system is faulty. Contact Fiat
Dealership as soon as possible.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
á
145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 15:18 Pagina 154
HIGH GEARBOX OIL
TEMPERATURE
The warning light comes on
(together with the message o the
display and the warning buzzer) glowing
steadily to indicate that the temperature
of the automatic transmission oil is too
high.
Contact immediately Fiat
Dealership in case of trans-
mission failure to have the
system checked.
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FAILURE
Turning the ignition key to ON,
the warning light on the dial shall turn on
and then go off after a few seconds.
The warning light (together with the mes-
sage o the display and the warning buzzer)
flashes to indicate a transmission failure.
155
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
MAIN BEAMS (blue)
The warning light turns on
when the main beams are
turned on.
1
LIMITED RANGE
(versions with reconfigurable
multifunction display)
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage to warn the driver that the cruising
range is less than 50 km.
ASR SYSTEM (versions with recon-
figurable multifunction display)
The ASR system can be turned off by
pressing the button ASR OFF.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage to warn the driver that the system
is off; at the same time the button led will
turn on.
Pressing again button ASR OFF will turn
off the button led and the display will show
the dedicated message to warn the dri-
ver that the system is active again.
POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE
ON THE ROAD
(versions with reconfigurable
multifunction display)
This indication starts flashing when the
outside temperature reaches or falls be-
low 3°C to warn the driver of the possi-
ble presence of ice on the road.
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage.
t
t
145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 15:18 Pagina 155
Should the warning light turn
on glowing steadily, reduce en-
gine perormance and contact
immediately Fiat Dealership.
156
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED
The display will show the dedicated mes-
sage and the buzzer will sound when the car
exceeds the speed limit set previously (see
“Reconfigurable Multifunction Display” in
section “Dashboard and controls”).
CRUISE CONTROL
(where provided)
The warning light turns on to-
gether with the message on the
display when turning the knurled ring of
the Cruise Control to ON.
BRAKE PAD WEAR
(where provided)
The warning light on the dial
turns on (together with the mes-
sage on the display) if the front brake pads
are worn; in this case have them changed
as soon as possible.
LOW ENGINE OIL
LEVEL
The warning light (if any) on the
dial comes on together with the
message on the display and the buzzer
when the engine oil level falls below the
minimum level. Restore proper oil level
(see “Checking levels” in section “Car
maintenance”).
Turning the ignition key to ON the warn-
ing light on the dial turns on but it should
go off after few seconds.
k
REAR SIDE CHEST
PROTECTION AIR
BAGS (Rear Side Bags)
OFF (where provided)
Warning light
À
turns on when the rear
side chest protection air bags are turned
off (Rear Side Bags) (where provided).
With the air bags on, by turning the key
to the ON position, the warning light
À
will turn on with a stationary light for ap-
prox. 4 seconds, then flash for the next 4
seconds, after which it will turn off.
À
ENGINE OFF WHEN RUNNING
Message is displayed when the engine is
turned off at a speed higher than 10 km/h;
steering lock is disabled.
To restore the function, turn the ignition
key to ON and then to OFF again with
the car stopped.
STARTING PROCEDURE
MESSAGES
(automatic transmission)
Starting procedure messages shown on
the display when reaching position ON
with enabled key.
STARTING PROCEDURE
MESSAGES (manual transmission)
Starting procedure messages shown on
the display when reaching position ON
with enabled key.
d
Ü
145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-05-2008 15:18 Pagina 156
157
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
STARTUP WITH AN AUXILIARY BATTERY ............... 158
COASTING STARTUP........................................................ 159
CHANGING A WHEEL ...................................................... 159
FIX & GO AUTOMATIC RAPID TYRE REPAIR KIT .. 165
CHANGING A LAMP.......................................................... 169
CHANGING AN EXTERIOR LAMP ................................ 173
CHANGING AN INTERIOR LAMP................................. 178
FUSE REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 181
BATTERY RECHARGING .................................................. 190
VEHICLE LIFTING ................................................................ 190
VEHICLE TOWING ............................................................. 191
II
I
N
N
A
A
N
N
E
E
M
M
E
E
R
R
G
G
E
E
N
N
C
C
Y
Y
In an emergency we recommend that you call the toll-free number found on the
Warranty Booklet. You can also connect to the site www.fiat.com
to search for the nearest Fiat Dealership point
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 157
158
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
If after a few attempts the engine does not
start, do not insist but contact the near-
est Fiat Dealership.
IMPORTANT Do not directly connect the
negative terminals of the two batteries:
sparks could ignite the flammable gas from
the battery. If the other battery is fitted in
another car, prevent accidental contacts
between the metal parts of the two cars.
JUMP STARTING
If the battery is flat, it is possible to start
the engine using an auxiliary battery with
the same capacity or a little higher than
the flat one.
Proceed as follows fig. 1:
Connect positive terminals (+ near
the terminal) of the two batteries with
a jump lead;
With a second lead, connect the neg-
ative terminal (–) of the auxiliary bat-
tery and to an earthing point
E
on the
engine or the gearbox of the car to be
started;
Start the engine;
When the engine has been started, re-
move the leads reversing the order
above.
fig. 1
F0L0127m
Under no circumstances
should a battery charger be
used to start the engine: it
could damage the electronic
systems and in particular the ignition
and injection control units.
Do not carry out this proce-
dure if you lack experience; if
it is not done correctly it can cause
very intense electrical discharges. In
addition, the fluid contained in the
battery is poisonous and corrosive.
Avoid contact with skin and eyes. You
are also advised not to put naked
flames or lighted cigarettes near the
battery and not to cause sparks.
WARNING
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 158
159
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
IF A TYRE IS
PUNCTURED
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Wheel changing and correct use of the
jack and space-saver spare wheel call for
some precautions as listed below.
BUMP STARTING
Never bump start the engine (by pushing,
towing, or coasting downhill) as this could
cause fuel to flow into the catalytic ex-
haust system and damage it beyond repair.
Remember that the brake booster and the
power steering system are not operating
until the engine is started, a greater effort
will therefore be required to press the
brake pedal or to turn the steering wheel.
Alert other drivers that the
car is stationary in compli-
ance with local regulations: hazard
warning lights, warning triangle etc.
Any passengers on board should leave
the car, especially if it is heavily laden.
Passengers should stay away from on-
coming traffic while the wheel is be-
ing changed on. If the wheel is being
changed on a steep or badly surfaced
road, place the wedges or other suit-
able material under the wheel to stop
the car.
WARNING
The space-saver spare wheel
is specific to your car, do not
use it on other models, or use the
spare wheel of other models on your
car. The space-saver spare wheel
shall only be used in an emergency.
It shall only be used for the distance
necessary to reach a service point and
the car speed shall not exceed 80
Km/h. The spare wheel has an orange
sticker that summarises the main cau-
tions for use and limitations. The
sticker should never be removed or
covered.
Never fit a wheel cap on a space-
saver spare wheel. The sticker gives
the following information in four lan-
guages: caution! For temporary use
only! 80 km/h max! Replace by nor-
mal wheel as soon as possible. Do not
cover this label.
WARNING
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 159
160
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
When driving with a space-
saver spare wheel fitted, the
driving performance of the car
changes. Avoid accelerating or brak-
ing sharply, abrupt turns or fast cor-
nerings. The life of the spare wheel
is approx. 3000 Km, after this dis-
tance it should be replaced with an-
other of the same type. Never at-
tempt to fit a conventional tyre on a
rim designed for use as a space-saver
spare wheel. Have the punctured
wheel repaired and refitted as soon
as possible. Two or more space-saver
spare wheels should never be used to-
gether. Do not grease the threads of
bolts before installing them: they
might slip out.
WARNING
The jack shall only be used
for changing wheels on the
car with which it is provided or on
cars of the same model.
It must not be used for other purpos-
es such as for instance raising cars of
other models. In no case should it be
used for repairs under the car. Incor-
rect positioning of the jack may cause
the jacked car to fall. Do not use the
jack for higher capacities than stated
on its label. Snow chains cannot be
fitted to the space-saver spare wheel.
So, if a front (drive) wheel is punc-
tured and chains are needed, a rear
wheel should be fitted to the front of
the car and the spare wheel should be
fitted to the rear. This way with two
normal drive wheels, snow chains can
be fitted to them to solve an emer-
gency.
WARNING
Fasten the wheel cap cor-
rectly to prevent the wheel
from coming free in motion. Never
tamper with the inflation valve. Nev-
er place tools between the rim and
tyre. Check and restore, if required,
the pressure of tyres and spare wheel
to the values given in section “Tech-
nical Specifications”.
WARNING
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 160
161
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
To change a wheel proceed as follows:
Stop the car in a position that is not
dangerous for oncoming traffic where
you can change the wheel safely. The
ground should be flat and adequately
firm;
Turn the engine off and pull up the
handbrake;
Engage first gear or reverse (position
P with automatic transmission);
Use the special handle to lift the load
surface (where provided), as shown in
fig. 2;
Lift the luggage compartment panel
mat
Make the wire secured under the
loading surface (where provided), pass
through the proper slot secured to
the boot shelf mat and fasten both to
the hook on the upper roof, as shown
in fig. 3;
Loosen the fastener A-fig. 4;
Please note:
the jack weight is 1,76 kg;
the jack requires no adjustment;
the jack cannot be repaired. If it breaks
it must be replaced with a new jack;
no tool other than its cranking device
may be fitted on the jack.
fig. 2
F0L0239m
fig. 3
F0L0240m
fig. 4
F0L0218m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 161
162
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Note Before replacing the drilled wheel
(if in alloy) in the specific housing, remo-
ve the snap-in logo holder pressing on it
from the its internal side.
For vehicles with steel rims, remove
the pressure inserted wheel hub cap
D-fig. 6;
loosen the bolts of the wheel to be re-
placed by about one turn with the
wrench provided E-fig. 7; if the car
is fitted with alloy rims, shake the car
to facilitate removing this rim from the
wheel hub;
take out the space-saver spare wheel
B-fig. 4 to access the tool container
C-fig. 5;
take out the tool container C-fig. 5
and take it near to the wheel to be
changed;
remove the spacer set under the
space-saver spare wheel to house the
standard size wheel.
IMPORTANT: failing to observe this pre-
scription could cause boot floor breaking.
fig. 5
F0L0219m
fig. 7
F0L0366m
fig. 6
D
F0L0370m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 162
163
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
make sure the contact surfaces be-
tween spare wheel and hub are clean
so that the fastening bolts will not
come loose;
using the wrench provided, fully tight-
en the five fastening bolts;
turn the jack handle L-fig. 8 to low-
er the car and remove the jack;
use the wrench provided to fasten the
bolts completely in a criss-cross fash-
ion as shown in fig. 9.
operate the device F-fig. 8 to extend
the jack until the top of the jack G-
fig. 8 fits correctly into catch H-
fig. 8;
warn anybody nearby that the car is
about to be lifted. They must stay clear
and not touch the car until it is back
on the ground;
fit the handle L-fig. 8 to operate the
jack and lift the car until the wheel to
be changed is several centimetres off
the ground;
fig. 8
F0L0367m
fig. 9
F0L0188m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 163
164
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
For versions with alloy rims
Insert the wheel on the hub and, using
the wrench provided, tighten the
bolts.
Lower the car and remove the jack.
Using the wrench provided, fully tigh-
ten the bolts in the sequence shown
in fig. 10;
insert the logo holder by pressing on
the exterior side.
When you have finished
Place the spacer.
Fit the jack partially open in its con-
tainer C-fig. 11 forcing it lightly to
prevent it from vibrating when travel-
ling.
Put the tools back into their places in
the container.
REFITTING THE STANDARD
WHEEL
Following the procedure described previ-
ously, raise the car and remove the spare
wheel.
For versions with steel rim
Proceed as follows:
make sure the contact surfaces be-
tween standard wheel and hub are
clean so that the fastening bolts will
not come loose;
fit the standard wheel by inserting the
first bolt for two threads into the hole
closest to the inflation valve;
using the wrench provided, tighten the
fastening bolts;
lower the car and remove the jack;
using the wrench provided, fully tight-
en the bolts in the sequence shown
previously;
fit the wheel cap making the groove
(on the wheel cap) coincide with the
inflation valve.
fig. 11
F0L0219m
fig. 10
2
5
3
1
4
F0L0368m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 164
165
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Stow the container C-fig. 11, com-
plete with tools in the boot.
Place the space-saver spare wheel B-
fig. 12 in the space provided for the
purpose inside the boot and secure it
with the clamping device A-fig. 12.
fig. 12
F0L0218m
QUICK TYRE REPAIR
KIT FIX & GO
automatic
The quick tyre repair kit Fix & Go auto-
matic is located in the appropriate con-
tainer in the boot .
The quick tyre repair kit includes fig. 13:
bottle A containing sealer and fitted
with:
– filler hose B
– sticker C with caution “max. 80
km/h”, to be affixed in a visible posi-
tion for the driver (instrument panel)
after repairing the tyre
instruction brochure (see fig. 14), to
be used for prompt and proper use of
the quick repair kit and to be then
handed to the personnel charged with
handling the treated tyre
compressor D including gauge and con-
nections
a pair of protection gloves located in
the side space of the compressor
adapters for inflating different elements.
Hand the instruction
brochure to the personnel
charged with treating the tyre re-
paired with the kit.
WARNING
In the event of a puncture
caused by foreign bodies, it is
possible to repair tyres show-
ing damages on the track or
shoulder up to max 4 mm diameter.
fig. 13
F0L0393m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 165
166
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Holes and damages on the
tyre side walls cannot be re-
paired. Do not use the quick tyre re-
pair kit if damaging is due to running
with flat tyre.
WARNING
Repairs are not possible in
case of damages on the
wheel rim (bad groove distortion
causing air loss). Do not remove for-
eign bodies (screws or nails) from the
tyre.
WARNING
The cylinder contains ethyl-
ene glycol. The cylinder con-
tains latex: it can cause allergic re-
actions. It is harmful if ingested or in-
haled and irritant for the eyes and in
case of contact. In case of contact
rinse immediately with water and
take off contaminated clothes. If
swallowed, do not induce vomit, rinse
out the mouth, drink a lot of water
and call the doctor immediately.
Keep away from children. This prod-
uct must not be used by asthmatics.
Do not inhale vapours. Call the doc-
tor immediately in case of allergic re-
actions. Keep the cylinder in the
space provided for the purpose and
far from heat. The sealing fluid has
limited life. Replace the cylinder if
sealer has run out.
WARNING
IT SHOULD BE NOTICED THAT:
The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repair
kit is effective with external temperatures
between –20 °C and +50 °C.
The compressor shall not be
operated for more than 20
minutes. Risk of overheating!. Tyres
repaired with the quick tyre repair kit
shall be used temporarily only.
WARNING
Do not throw away the cylin-
der and the sealing fluid.
Have the sealing fluid and the
cylinder disposed of in com-
pliance with national and local regu-
lations.
fig. 14
F0L0394m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 166
167
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
INFLATING PROCEDURE
Put on the protection gloves
provided together with quick
tyre repair kit.
WARNING
Pull up the handbrake. Loosen tyre
inflation valve cap, take out the filler
hose A-fig. 15 and screw the ring nut
B on the tyre valve;
make sure the compressor switch
E-fig. 17 is set to 0 (off), start the en-
gine and fit plug D-fig. 16 into the cig-
ar lighter outlet and then turn on the
compressor by setting switch E-fig. 17
to I (on). Inflate the tyre to the pres-
sure specified in paragraph “Cold tyre
inflation pressure” in section “Techni-
cal specifications”. Check tyre pressure
on gauge F-fig. 17 with compressor off
to obtain precise reading;
If after 5 minutes it is still impossible
to reach at least 1.5 bar, disengage com-
pressor from valve and current outlet,
then move the car forth for approx. ten
metres in order to distribute the seal-
ing fluid inside the tyre evenly, then re-
peat the inflation operation;
If after this operation it is still impossi-
ble after 5 minutes to reach at least 1.8
bar, do not start driving since the tyre
is excessively damaged and the quick
tyre repair kit cannot guarantee suit-
able sealing, contact Fiat Dealership;
If reaching the tyre pressure specified
in paragraph “Cold tyre inflation pres-
sure” in section “Technical specifica-
tions”, start driving immediately;
fig. 17
F0L0396m
fig. 15
F0L0530m
fig. 16
D
F0L0533m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 167
168
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Apply the sticker in a visible
position for the driver to in-
dicate that the tyre has been treat-
ed with the quick tyre repair kit. Dri-
ve carefully especially when corner-
ing. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Avoid
heavy braking and accelerating.
WARNING
after driving for about 10 minutes stop
and check again the tyre pressure; pull
up the handbrake;
FOR CHECKING AND
RESTORING PRESSURE ONLY
The compressor can be also used just for
restoring pressure. Disconnect the quick
connection and connect it directly to the
tyre valve fig. 19; in this way the cylinder
is not connected to compressor and the
sealing fluid will not flow into the tyre.
if at least 1.8 bar pressure is read, re-
store proper pressure (with engine
running and handbrake on) and restart;
drive with the utmost care to the near-
est Fiat Dealership.
It is of vital importance to
communicate that the tyre
has been repaired using the quick tyre
repair kit. Hand the instruction
brochure to the personnel charged
with treating the tyre repaired with
the kit.
WARNING
If the pressure falls below 1.8
bars, do not drive any fur-
ther: the quick tyre repair kit Fix & Go
automatic cannot guarantee proper
hold because the tyre is too much
damaged. Contact Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
fig. 18
F0L0531m
fig. 19
F0L0532m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 168
169
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
PROCEDURE
To replace the cylinder proceed as fol-
lows:
disconnect connection B-fig. 20;
turn counter-clockwise the cylinder to
replace and raise it;
fit the new cylinder and turn it clock-
wise;
connect connection B to the cylinder
and fit the transparent tube A into the
proper space.
WHEN NEEDING TO
CHANGE A BULB
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
When a light is not working, check
that the corresponding fuse is intact
before changing a bulb. For the loca-
tion of fuses, refer to the paragraph “If
a fuse blows” in this section;
Before changing a bulb check the con-
tacts for oxidation;
Burnt bulbs must be replaced by oth-
ers of the same type and power;
Always check the height of the head-
light beam after changing a bulb.
Halogen bulbs must be han-
dled touching only the metal-
lic part. If the transparent bulb
is touched with the fingers, its
lighting intensity is reduced and life of
the bulb may be compromised. If
touched accidentally, rub the bulb with
a cloth moistened with alcohol and al-
low to dry.
Modifications or repairs to
the electrical system (elec-
tronic control units) carried out in-
correctly and without bearing the fea-
tures of the system in mind can cause
malfunctions with the risk of fire.
WARNING
Halogen bulbs contain pres-
surised gas which, if broken,
may cause small fragments of glass to
be projected outwards.
WARNING
fig. 20
F0L0398m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 169
170
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
TYPES OF BULBS fig. 21
Various types of bulbs are fitted to your
car:
A Glass bulbs: clipped into position. Pull
to remove.
B Bayonet type bulbs: press the bulb,
turn counterclockwise to remove
this type of bulb from its holder.
C Tubular bulbs: release them from
their contacts to remove.
D-E Halogen bulbs: to remove the bulb,
release the clip holding the bulb in
place.
F Gas-discharge bulbs (Xenon).
F0L0072m
fig. 21
Due to high voltage, the bulb
of (Xenon) gas-discharge
headlights must only be replaced by
experts: danger of death! Contact Fi-
at Dealership.
WARNING
IMPORTANT The headlight inner surface
may be lightly misted over: this is not a
fault but a natural fact due to low tem-
perature and the level of air humidity. It
will disappear as soon the headlights are
turned on. The presence of drops inside
the headlights means water infiltration,
therefore contact Fiat Dealership.
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 170
171
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Bulbs Ref. Figure Type Power
Main beam headlights E H1 55W
Dipped beam headlights Longlife D H1 55W
Gas-discharge dipped beam headlights (where provided) F D1S 35W
Longlife front sidelights (2 per light) A W5W 5W
Front fog lights (where provided) E H11 55W
Front direction indicators B PY24W 24W
Side direction indicators A WY5W 5W
Rear direction indicators B R10W 10W
Taillights/brake lights B P21/5W 21W/5W
Third brake light (additional brake light) A W2,3W 2,3W
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 171
172
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Bulbs Ref. Figure Type Power
Reversing light B P21W 21W
Rear fog lights B P21W 21W
Number plate lights C C5W 5W
Puddle / door lights A W5W 5W
Front roof light C C5W 5W
Rear roof light C C10W 10W
Glovebox light C C5W 5W
Boot light A W5W 5W
Sun visor lights C C5W 5W
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 172
173
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHT
BURNS OUT
For the type of bulb and power rating, see
“When needing to change a bulb”.
FRONT LIGHT UNITS fig. 22
The front light units contain the side/tail-
lights, dipped beam, main beam and di-
rection indicator bulbs.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light unit
as follows:
A Sidelights / main beam headlights;
B Dipped beam headlights;
C Direction indicators.
DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS
Gas-filled filament lamps
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
remove the protective cover B-fig. 22;
release the bulb holder catch A-fig. 23;
disconnect the electric connector B;
remove the bulb C and replace it;
fit the new bulb, making the tabs of the
metallic part coincide with the grooves
on the reflector, reconnect the electri-
cal connector B then hook the bulb
holder catch A;
refit the protective cover A-fig. 22
correctly.
Gas-discharge lamps (Bi-Xenon)
(where provided)
Due to high voltage, the bulb
of (Bi-Xenon) gas-discharge
headlights must only be replaced by
experts: danger of death! Contact Fi-
at Dealership.
WARNING
fig. 22
F0L0399m
fig. 23
F0L0402m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 173
174
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SIDELIGHTS
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
remove the protective cover A-fig. 22;
turn the bulb holder A-fig. 24 coun-
terclockwise and then withdraw it;
remove the bulb B and replace it;
fit the new bulb, refit the bulb holder
A-fig. 24 and then refit the protective
cover B-fig. 22 correctly.
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
remove the protective cover A-fig. 22;
release the bulb holder catch A-fig. 25;
remove the bulb C and replace it;
fit the new bulb, making the tabs of the
metallic part coincide with the grooves
on the reflector, reconnect the electri-
cal connector B then hook the bulb
holder catch A;
refit the protective cover B-fig. 22 cor-
rectly.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Front
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
turn the protective cover C-fig. 22
counterclockwise;
remove the bulb B-fig. 26 and replace
it;
refit the protective cover A correctly.
fig. 24
F0L0403m
fig. 26
F0L0405m
fig. 25
F0L0404m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 174
175
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Side fig. 19
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
lever in the point shown by the arrow
to compress the catch and remove the
unit A;
turn the bulb holder B counterclock-
wise, remove the snap-fitted bulb and
replace it;
refit the bulb holder B in the trans-
parent cover, then position the unit
making sure the catch clicks into place.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS fig. 28
(where provided)
Contact Fiat Dealership to have front fog
lights replaced.
REAR LIGHT UNITS
Tailgate light unit
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
open the tailgate;
push down cover A-fig. 29 and re-
move electric connectorB-fig. 30;
fig. 29
F0L0083m
fig. 27
F0L0520m
fig. 28
F0L0534m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 175
Side fixed light unit
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
open the tailgate;
loosen the two screws F-fig. 32 and
remove the light unit;
remove the electrical connector;
176
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
push the bulb holder side tabs C-fig.
31 inwards to remove it;
remove bulbs slightly pushing them
and turning counterclockwise.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light unit
as follows (fig. 31):
D reversing lights;
E rear fog lights.
fig. 30
F0L0084m
fig. 31
F0L0080m
fig. 32
F0L0085m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 176
177
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
press the bulb holder tab G-fig. 33 to
remove it;
remove bulbs slightly pushing them
and turning counterclockwise.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light unit
as follows (fig. 33):
H taillights / brake lights;
I direction indicators.
ADDITIONAL BRAKING LIGHT
(THIRD STOP)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
open the tailgate;
remove the snap-fitted cover;
press catches B-fig. 34 and remove
the bulb holder;
fig. 33
F0L0081m
remove the snap-fitted bulbs and
change them;
refit the bulb holder making sure
catches B-fig. 34 click into place.
fig. 34
F0L0190m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 177
178
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
NUMBER PLATE LIGHT fig. 36
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
work in the point shown by the arrow
and remove lens A;
change the bulb B releasing it from the
side contacts and making sure the new
bulb is correctly fastened between the
contacts;
refit the lens.
IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT
BURNS OUT
For the type of bulb and power rating, see
“When needing to change a bulb”.
fig. 36
F0L0079m
fig. 37
F0L0086m
FRONT CEILING LIGHT
fig. 37-38
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
work in the points shown by the ar-
rows and remove cover A;
turn the 2 bulb holders B counter-
clockwise, remove and replace bulbs;
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 178
179
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
COURTESY MIRROR LIGHT
fig. 39
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
open the mirror cover A;
remove the bulb B levering in the
points shown by the arrows;
replace the bulb releasing it from the
side contacts making sure that the new
bulb is correctly clamped between the
contacts.
GLOVEBOX LIGHT fig. 40
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
open the glovebox, remove the light
unit A levering in the point shown by
the arrow;
replace the bulb releasing it from the
side contacts making sure that the new
bulb is correctly clamped between the
contacts.
to replace the bulb C, release it from
the side contacts making sure that the
new bulb is correctly clamped be-
tween the contacts.
fig. 38
F0L0087m
fig. 39
F0L0088m
fig. 40
F0L0202m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 179
180
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
open the protection B-fig. 42 and re-
place the snap-fitted bulb;
re-close the protective cover B-
fig. 42 on the transparent;
refit the light unit A-fig. 41 inserting
it in its correct position firstly on one
end and then on the other until it
clicks into place.
PUDDLE / DOOR LIGHTS fig. 43
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
open the door and remove the trans-
parent cover A levering in the point
shown by the arrow;
open the protection B and replace the
snap-fitted bulb;
re-close the protective cover B on the
transparent cover A.
BOOT LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
open the tailgate;
remove the light unit A-fig. 41 lever-
ing in the point shown by the arrow.
fig. 41
F0L0089m
fig. 42
F0L0090m
fig. 43
F0L0180m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 180
181
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SIDE REAR CEILING LIGHTS
fig. 44
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
remove the light unit A levering in the
point shown by the arrow;
replace the bulb B releasing it from
the side contacts making sure that the
new bulb is correctly clamped be-
tween the contacts.
fig. 45
F0L0092m
If a fuse switches off again,
contact the Fiat Service Net-
work .
WARNING
fig. 44
F0L0091m
IF A FUSE BLOWS
GENERAL fig. 45
The fuse is a protective device for the
electric system: it comes into action (i.e.
it cuts off) mainly due to a fault or im-
proper action on the system.
When a device does not work, check the
efficiency of its fuse: the conductor ele-
ment A must be intact. If not, replace the
fuse with one of the same amp rating
(same colour).
B undamaged fuse
C fuse with damaged filament.
To replace a fuse, use the pliers D hooked
to the fusebox on the dashboard.
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 181
FUSE LOCATION
The vehicle’s fuses are grouped in three
central units that are located on the in-
strument dashboard, in the engine com-
partment and inside the boot (left side).
On the battery’s positive pole there is a
fourth control unit that contains large ca-
pacity fuses (MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE,
MAXI-FUSE).
To replace these fuses, con-
tact the Fiat Service Net-
work.
WARNING
182
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Before replacing a fuse, make
sure the ignition key has been
removed and that all the oth-
er services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If a general fuse (MEGA-
FUSE, MIDI-FUSE, MAXI-
FUSE) cuts in, do not attempt any re-
pair and contact a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
Never replace a fuse with met-
al wires or anything else.
Never change a fuse with
another with a higher amp
rating, DANGER OF FIRE.
WARNING
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 182
fig. 47
F0L0093m
Fuse box on the dashboard
fig. 46-47
To gain access to the fuses in the fuse box
on the dashboard, loosen the fastening
screw A and remove the cover.
fig. 46
F0L0145m
183
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 183
184
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Fuse box in engine compartment
fig. 48-49
To gain access to the fuses in the fuse box
next to the battery, remove the protec-
tion cover.
fig. 48
fig. 49
F0L0094m
F0L0095m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 184
185
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Fuse box in the boot fig. 50-51
To gain access to the fuse box located on
the left side of boot open the relevant
door (as shown in the figure).
fig. 50
fig. 51
F0L0217m
F0L0213m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 185
186
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
F 12
F 13
F 31
F 32
F 33
F 34
F 35
F 36
F 37
F 38
F 39
F 40
F 41
F 42
F 43
F 44
15
15
7.5
15
20
20
7.5
20
10
15
10
30
7.5
7.5/15 (*)
30
20
FUSE SUMMARY TABLE
Fuse box on dashboard
USERS FUSE AMPERE
RH low beam
LH low beam - Light stability corrector
+15 excluded during ignition for dashboard control unit relay coils / engine
compartment and Body computer
+30 nodes front driver and passenger doors (door lock), TEG reader
Boot compartment node power supply (rear left power window)
Boot compartment node power supply (rear right power window)
+15 backing lights, supplementary heater control unit, flow gauge, water in diesel fuel
sensor, NC switch on brake pedal
+30 boot compartment node (rear door locks)
+15 instrument panel, control unit on gas discharge headlamps, NA switch on brake
pedal, supplementary stop light
Boot opening actuator
+30 EOBD diagnostic socket , central front ceiling light, rear side ceiling lights, siren
and volumetric sensor control unit for the antitheft system, tyre pressure control unit,
air conditioning control unit, Blue-tooth control unit
Heated rear window
Windscreen / rear window washer nozzle demisters
+15 ABS / ESP control unit, electrohydraulic driving node, yaw sensor , steering
angle sensor
+15 excluded during ignition for electronic column switch module (windscreen wipers,
windscreen / rear window washer pump)
+15 excluded during ignition for cigar lighter, current outlet on tunnel
(*) Depending on the version
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 186
187
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
F 45
F 46
F 47
F 48
F 49
F 50
F 51
F 52
F 53
20
20
20
20
7.5
7.5
7.5
15
10
USERS FUSE AMPERE
Sun roof engine control unit power supply
Sun roof visor engine control unit power supply
Front driver door node power supply (front driver power window)
Front passenger door node power supply (front passenger power window)
+15 volumetric sensor control unit for antitheft device, emergency control display
plaque lights / Blue-tooth and roof visor on roof panel / driver and passenger front
seat console, driver side control dashboard lights / tunnel, DVD player presetting,
electrochromic mirror, air conditioning
+15 airbag control unit
+15 Connect, Blue-tooth control unit, after market radio presetting, pneumatic
pressure control unit, cruise control, rain / twilight sensor control unit, parking
sensor control unit, AQS sensor
+15 excluded during ignition for electronic column switch module (rear window
wiper), relay coil on boot compartment control unit
+30 instrument panel
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 187
188
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
F 9
F 10
F 11
F 14
F 15
F 16
F 17
F 18
F 19
F 20
F 21
F 22
F 23
F 24
F 30
7.5
15
15
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
7.5
7.5
20
15
20
20
15
7.5
Fuse box in engine compartment
USERS FUSE AMPERE
Left fog light / cornering light
Buzzers
Engine control system power supply
RH high beam
LH high beam
+15 engine control unit
Engine control system power supply
+30 engine control unit
Conditioner compressor
Headlamp washer pump
Fuel pump
Engine control system power supply
+30 radio / Connect, supplementary heater control unit
+15 automatic transmission control unit, automatic transmission switch
Right fog light / cornering light
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 188
F 54
F 55
F 56
F 57
F 58
F 59
F 60
F 61
F 62
F 63
F 64
F 65
F 66
F 67
F 68
F 69
F 77
F 78
F 79
F 80
25
25
7.5
25
7.5
189
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Fuse box in the boot
USERS FUSE AMPERE
+30 Hi-Fi audio amplifier
Free
+30 front driver seat regulation control unit
+15 excluded during ignition for front driver seat heating
Free
Free
+30 front passenger seat regulation control unit
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
+15 excluded during ignition for front driver seat heating
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 189
190
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT
WARNING The battery charging proce-
dure is described only for information pur-
poses. This operation should be carried
out by Fiat Dealership.
Charging should be slow at a low amp rat-
ing for 24 hours. Charging for a longer
time may damage the battery.
Charge the battery as follows:
disconnect battery negative terminal;
connect the charger cables to the bat-
tery terminals, observing the poles;
turn on the charger;
when you have finished, turn the
charger off before disconnecting the
battery;
reconnect battery negative terminal.
IMPORTANT If the car is fitted with alarm
system, turn it off with the remote con-
trol (see “Alarm” in section “Dashboard
and controls”).
The liquid in the battery is
poisonous and corrosive. Do
not let it touch the skin or eyes.
Recharging the battery should be
done in a well ventilated area away
from naked flames or possible sources
of sparks: explosion and fire risk.
WARNING
Do not attempt to charge a
frozen battery: it must first-
ly be thawed, otherwise it may burst.
If freezing has occurred, the battery
should be checked by skilled person-
nel to make sure that the internal el-
ements are not damaged and that the
body is not cracked, with the risk of
leaking poisonous and corrosive acid.
WARNING
JACKING THE CAR
If the car is to be lifted, go to a Fiat Deal-
ership which is equipped with the arm
hoist or workshop lift.
Jack up the car only by positioning the jack
arms or the shop jack in the points shown
in fig. 52.
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 190
191
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
TOWING THE CAR
The tow ring provided with the car is
housed in the tool box under the boot
mat.
TOW RING HOOKING fig. 53-54
Proceed as follows:
release the cap A;
take the tow hook B from its support;
tighten the ring on the rear or front
threaded pin.
Refer to the specific chapter for towing
cars fitted with electronic automatic trans-
mission.
fig. 53
A
F0L0362m
fig. 54
A
F0L0363m
fig. 52
F0L0525m
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 191
192
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
When towing, remember
that without the help of the
brake booster and power steering, a
greater effort is required on the ped-
al and steering wheel. Do not use
flexible cables for towing and avoid
jerks. During towing operations
make sure that fastening the joint to
the car does not damage the com-
ponents in contact with it. When
towing the car, you must comply
with the specific traffic regulations
regarding the tow ring and how to
tow on the road.
WARNING
Do not start the engine
when towing the car.
WARNING
Before starting to tow, dis-
engage the steering lock
(see paragraph “Ignition device” in
section “Dashboard and controls”).
When towing, remember that with-
out the help of the brake booster
and power steering, a greater effort
is required on the pedal and steering
wheel. Do not use flexible cables for
towing and avoid jerks. During tow-
ing operations make sure that fas-
tening the joint to the car does not
damage the components in contact
with it. When towing the car, you
must comply with the specific traffic
regulations regarding the tow ring
and how to tow on the road.
WARNING
Before fitting the hook,
clean accurately its thread-
ed seat. Before starting to tow, make
sure to have tighten the hook.
WARNING
157-192 Croma TRW GB 19-02-2009 14:58 Pagina 192
193
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................. 194
SERVICE SCHEDULE ........................................................... 195
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ............................................. 197
HEAVY-DUTY ...................................................................... 197
CHECKING FLUID LEVELS................................................ 198
AIR FILTER/POLLEN FILTER ............................................ 207
DIESEL FUEL FILTER ........................................................... 207
BATTERY ................................................................................ 208
WHEELS AND TYRES......................................................... 210
RUBBER HOSES .................................................................... 211
WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW WIPERS................... 212
BODYWORK ........................................................................ 213
INTERIORS ............................................................................ 215
CC
C
A
A
R
R
M
M
A
A
I
I
N
N
T
T
E
E
N
N
A
A
N
N
C
C
E
E
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 193
194
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
IMPORTANT The Programmed Mainte-
nance coupons are specified by the Man-
ufacturer- The failure to have them car-
ried out may invalidate the warranty.
Scheduled Servicing is performed by all Fi-
at Dealership, at pre-established times.
If during each operation, in addition to the
ones programmed, the need arises for fur-
ther replacements or repairs, these may
be carried out only with the explicit agree-
ment of the Customer.
IMPORTANT You are advised to contact
Fiat Dealership in the event of any minor
operating faults, without waiting for the
next service coupon.
If your car is used frequently for towing,
the interval between one service coupon
and the other must be reduced.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance is essential for en-
suring long car life under the best condi-
tions.
This is why Fiat has programmed a series
of checks and maintenance operations
every 35.000 km.
It is however important to remember that
scheduled servicing does not completely
cover all the car’s requirements: also in
the initial period before 35.000 km service
coupon and later, between one coupon
and another, ordinary care is still required
such as for example routine check and
topping up the level of fluids, tyre pressure
check, etc...
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 194
195
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
35 70 105 140 175
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●
●●
●●●●●
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Thousands of km
Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if required
Check light system operation (headlights,
direction indicators, hazard lights, boot lights, passenger
compartment lights, glovebox lights, warning lights, etc.)
Check windscreen wiper/washer operation,
adjust nozzles if required
Check windscreen/rear window blade position/wear
Check front disk brake pad conditions and wear
and wear indicator operation
Check rear disk brake pad conditions and wear
Sight inspect the conditions of: body external parts, underbody
protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts
(boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)
Check cleanness of locks, bonnet and boot and lever cleanness
and lubrication
Check and top up, if required, fluid levels
(brakes/hydraulic clutch, power steering, windscreen washer,
battery, engine coolant, etc.)
Check power steering hydraulic system (2.2 version)
Check and adjust handbrake lever stroke
Sight inspect accessory drive belt conditions
(except 1.8 version)
Sight inspect accessory drive belt conditions (1.8 version)
Sight inspect timing belt conditions (1.8 version)
Check and adjust tappet clearance (1.9 Multijet 8v version)
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 195
196
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
35 70 105 140 175
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●
●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●
●●●●●
●●●●●
Thousands of km
Check and adjust tappet clearance, if required (1.8 version)
Check exhaust emissions (petrol versions)
Check exhaust emissions/smoke (Multijet versions)
Check engine control system operation (through diagnosis socket)
Replace accessory drive belt/s (except 1.8 version)
Replace accessory drive belt/s (1.8 version)
Replace timing belt (1.8 version) (*)
Replace timing belt (Multijet versions) (*)
Change spark plugs (petrol versions except 1.8)
Change spark plugs (1.8 version)
Replace diesel fuel filter (Multijet versions)
Change air cleaner cartridge (petrol versions)
Change air cleaner cartridge (Multijet versions)
Change engine oil and oil filter (1.8 petrol versions)
(or every 12 months)
Change engine oil and oil filter (Multijet versions with DPF) (**)
(or every 24 months)
Change engine oil and oil filter (Multijet versions without DPF)
(or every 24 months)
Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)
Change pollen filter (or every 15 months)
Check and to top up, if required, automatic gearbox oil
(automatic gearbox versions)
(*) Regardless of the km covered, the timing belt shall be replaced every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, driving in the city,
idling for a long time) or in any case every 5 years.
(**) Engine oil and oil filter shall actually be changed according to the conditions of use of the car and it is indicated by the relevant warning light
or message (where provided) on the instrument panel.
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 196
197
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
HEAVY-DUTY
Should prevailing use of the car be under
one of the following specially heavy con-
ditions:
trailer or caravan towing;
dusty roads;
short distances (less than 7-8 km) re-
peated and with external tempera-
tures below zero;
frequently idling engines or long dis-
tance low speed driving (e.g. door-to-
door deliveries) or in case of a long
term inactivity;
driving in the city;
carry out the following checks more fre-
quently than required in the Service
Schedule:
check front disk brake pad conditions
and wear;
check cleanness of locks, bonnet and
boot and lever cleanness and lubrica-
tion;
sight inspect the conditions of: engine,
gearbox, transmission, pipes and hoses
(exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts
(boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.);
check battery charge and fluid level
(electrolyte) (only to be carried out by
skilled personnel or at Fiat Dealership
– see also paragraph “Battery” in this
section);
visual check on various drive belt con-
ditions;
check and replace pollen filter, if re-
quired;
check and replace air cleaner, if re-
quired.
ROUTINE
MAINTENANCE
Every 1,000 km or before long journeys,
check and top up if required:
engine coolant fluid level;
brake fluid level;
windscreen washer fluid level;
tyre pressure and conditions;
light system operation (headlights, di-
rection indicators, hazard lights, etc.);
windscreen wiper/washer operation
and windscreen/rear window blade
position/wear;
Every 3,000 km check and top up if re-
quired: engine oil level.
You are recommended to use FL
Selenia, products, designed and pro-
duced specifically for Fiat cars (see table
“Capacities” in section “Technical speci-
fications”).
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 197
198
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
CHECKING FLUID
LEVELS
1. Engine oil
2. Battery
3. Brake fluid
4. Windscreen/rear window washer
fluid
5. Engine coolant
6. Power steering fluid
Never smoke while working
in the engine compartment;
gas and inflammable vapours may be
present, with the risk of fire.
WARNING
When topping up take care
not to confuse the various
types of fluids: they are all in-
compatible with one another
and could seriously damage the car.
fig. 1 - 1.8 versions
F0L0522m
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 198
199
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
1. Engine oil
2. Battery
3. Brake fluid
4. Windscreen/rear window washer
fluid
5. Engine coolant
IMPORTANT Topping up or change of
the power steering fluid of 2.2 petrol ver-
sions shall be carried out at a Fiat Deal-
ership.
When topping up take care
not to confuse the various
types of fluids: they are all in-
compatible with one another
and could seriously damage the car.
Never smoke while working
in the engine compartment;
gas and inflammable vapours may be
present, with the risk of fire.
WARNING
fig. 2 - 2.2 versions
F0L0158m
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 199
When topping up take care
not to confuse the various
types of fluids: they are all in-
compatible with one another
and could seriously damage the car.
200
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
1. Engine oil
2. Battery
3. Brake fluid
4. Windscreen/rear window washer
fluid
5. Engine coolant
6. Power steering fluid
fig. 3 - 1.9 Multijet 8V versions
F0L0208m
Never smoke while working
in the engine compartment;
gas and inflammable vapours may be
present, with the risk of fire.
WARNING
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 200
201
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
fig. 4 - 1.9 Multijet 16V versions
F0L0521m
When topping up take care
not to confuse the various
types of fluids: they are all in-
compatible with one another
and could seriously damage the car.
Never smoke while working
in the engine compartment;
gas and inflammable vapours may be
present, with the risk of fire.
WARNING
1. Engine oil
2. Battery
3. Brake fluid
4. Windscreen/rear window washer
fluid
5. Engine coolant
6. Power steering fluid
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 201
202
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
1. Engine oil
2. Battery
3. Brake fluid
4. Windscreen/rear window washer
fluid
5. Engine coolant
6. Power steering fluid
fig. 5 - 2.4 Multijet 20V versions
F0L0317m
When topping up take care
not to confuse the various
types of fluids: they are all in-
compatible with one another
and could seriously damage the car.
Never smoke while working
in the engine compartment;
gas and inflammable vapours may be
present, with the risk of fire.
WARNING
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 202
203
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL
Checking engine oil
Check the oil level a few minutes (about
5) after the engine has stopped, with the
car parked on level ground.
Remove the dipstick A and clean it, put
it back in completely, remove it and check
that the level is within the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick. The gap between
the MIN and MAX marks corresponds
to about one litre of oil.
Topping up engine oil
If the oil level is near or even below the
MIN mark, add oil through the filler neck
B, until reaching the MAX mark.
Oil level shall never exceed the MA mark.
IMPORTANT If a routine check reveals
that the oil level is above the MAX mark,
contact Fiat Dealership to have the cor-
rect level restored.
IMPORTANT After adding or changing
the oil, let the engine turn over for a few
seconds and wait a few minutes after turn-
ing it off before you check the level.
When the engine is hot, take
care when working inside the
engine compartment to avoid burns.
Remember that when the engine is
hot, fan may cut in: danger of injury.
Scarves, ties and other loose cloth-
ing might be pulled by moving parts.
WARNING
fig. 7 - 2.2 versions
F0L0198m
fig. 8 - 1.9 Multijet 8V versions
F0L0211m
fig. 9 - 1.9 Multijet 16V versions
F0L0210m
fig. 10 - 2.4 Multijet 20V versions
F0L0316m
fig. 6 - 1.8 versions
F0L0523m
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 203
204
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COOLANT FLUID fig. 11
The coolant level shall be checked with
cold engine and shall not be lower than
the MIN on the reservoir.
If the level is low, pour slowly a mixture
of 50% distilled water and 50%
PARAFLU UP by FL Selenia through
the filler neck A.
A 50-50 mixture of PARAFLU UP and
distilled water gives freeze protection to
–35°C.
For particularly hard climate conditions, we
recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP
and 40% demineralized water mixture.
Used engine oil and filter con-
tain harmful substances for
the environment. Contact Fi-
at Dealership to have the oil
and filter changed.
Engine oil consumption
Max engine oil consumption is usually 400
grams every 1000 km.
When the car is new, the engine needs
to run in, therefore the engine oil con-
sumption can only be considered stabilised
after the first 5000 - 6000 km.
IMPORTANT The oil consumption de-
pends on driving style and the conditions
under which the car is used.
IMPORTANT Do not add oil with speci-
fications other than that already in the en-
gine.
fig. 11
F0L0194m
The cooling system uses
PARAFLU UP antifreeze. Do
not add fluid having different
specifications from that al-
ready existing. PARAFLU UP cannot be
mixed with other types of fluids. Should
other fluids be added, do not start the
engine and contact Fiat Dealership as
soon as possible.
Do not remove the reservoir
cap when the engine is hot:
you risk scalding yourself.
WARNING
The cooling system is pres-
surised. If necessary, replace
the cap only with another genuine
one, otherwise system efficiency could
be compromised.
WARNING
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 204
205
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
POWER STEERING FLUID fig. 14
1.8 petrol and Multijet versions
Check that the fluid level in the reservoir
is at maximum level.
This operation shall be carried out with
the car on level surface, engine not run-
ning and cold.
Check that the fluid level is at the MAX
mark on the dipstick integral with reser-
voir cap A-fig. 14.
If the fluid level in the reservoir is below
the specified level, contact Fiat Dealership.
WINDSCREEN/REAR
WINDOW/HEADLIGHT
WASHER FLUID
To top up, remove the cap A-fig. 12 and
then pour a mixture of water and
TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35, in
the following concentrations:
30% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 70% water in summer;
50% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 50% water in winter.
In case of temperatures below –20°C, use
undiluted TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35.
Check level through the reservoir.
Proper dipstick shows the fluid level fig.
13 in the windscreen washer reservoir.
fig. 12
F0L0192m
fig. 13
F0L0193m
Do not travel with the wind-
screen washer reservoir
empty. The windscreen washer is fun-
damental for improving visibility.
WARNING
Certain commercial addi-
tives for windscreen washers
are inflammable. The engine com-
partment contains hot components
which may set it on fire.
WARNING
fig. 14 - Multijet -
1.8 petrol versions
F0L0212m
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 205
206
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
BRAKE FLUID fig. 15
Unscrew cap A: check that the fluid level
in the reservoir is at maximum.
Fluid level in the reservoir shall not exceed
the MAX mark.
If fluid has to be added, it is suggested to
use the brake fluid in table "Fluids and lu-
bricants" (see chapter "Technical charac-
teristics").
NOTE Clean accurately the tank cap A
and the surrounding surface.
2.2 versions
Contact Fiat Dealership for topping up or
changing the power steering fluid.
Do not allow the power
steering fluid to touch the
hot parts of the engine: it is inflam-
mable.
WARNING
fig. 15
F0L0196m
Make sure that the highly cor-
rosive brake fluid does not drip
onto the paintwork; if it does,
wash it off immediately with
water.
At plug opening, pay maximum attention
in order to prevent any impurities from
entering the tank.
For topping up, always use a funnel with
integrated filter with mesh equal to or
lower than 0.12 mm.
IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbs mois-
ture, for this reason, if the vehicle is main-
ly used in areas with a high degree of at-
mospheric humidity, the fluid should be
replaced at more frequent intervals than
specified in the “Service schedule”.
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 206
207
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
DIESEL FUEL FILTER
DRAINING THE CONDENSE
(Multijet versions)
AIR FILTER/POLLEN
FILTER
Air cleaner or pollen filter replacement
shall be carried out at a Fiat Dealership.
Brake fluid is poisonous and
highly corrosive. In the event
of accidental contact, wash the parts
involved immediately with neutral
soap and water, then rinse thor-
oughly. Call the doctor immediately
if the fluid is swallowed.
WARNING
0
Symbol
π
on the container
indicates synthetic brake flu-
id, distinguishing it from the mineral
kind. Using mineral fluids irreversibly
damages the special braking system
rubber seals.
WARNING
The presence of water in the
fuel circuit can severely dam-
age the injection system and
make the engine misfire. If the
warning light c turns on, contact a Fi-
at Dealership as soon as possible to
have the bleeding operation carried
out. Should the warning light turn on
after refuelling, water has probably
been poured into the tank: turn the en-
gine off immediately and contact a Fi-
at Dealership.
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 207
CHANGING THE BATTERY
If required, replace the battery with a gen-
uine spare part having the same specifi-
cations.
If a battery with different specifications is
fitted, the service intervals given in the
“Service schedule” in this section will no
longer be valid.
Refer to the instructions provided by the
battery manufacturer.
208
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
fig. 16
F0L0191m
BATTERY
The battery is of the “Limited mainte-
nance” type: under normal conditions of
use the electrolyte does not need topping
up with distilled water.
CHECKING THE CHARGE fig. 16
The battery charge may be checked sat-
isfactorily through the inspection slot us-
ing the indicator A (where provided) and
acting according to the colour the indica-
tor shows.
If the battery does not fit a charge and
electrolyte level gauge, the corresponding
operations must be performed by spe-
cialised personnel only.
Refer to the table below or to the label
B on the battery.
The liquid in the battery is
poisonous and corrosive.
Avoid contact with eyes and skin. Do
not bring naked flames or possible
sources of sparks near to the battery:
risk of fire and explosion.
WARNING
Running the battery with
low fluid level can damage
the battery beyond repair and could
also cause its explosion.
WARNING
Bright white colour Top up electrolyte Contact Fiat Dealership
Dark colour without Low charge level Charge the battery
green area in the centre (advisable to contact
Fiat Dealership)
Dark colour with Electrolyte level and charge No action
green area in the centre sufficient
IMPORTANT Check the battery charge
once a year, preferably before the begin-
ning to winter, to prevent freezing of the
electrolyte. Perform this inspection more
frequently if the car is mainly used for
short distances or if electrical devices run-
ning with the key off are installed, partic-
ularly after-market.
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 208
209
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
USEFUL ADVICE FOR
LENGTHENING THE LIFE OF
YOUR BATTERY
To avoid draining your battery and length-
en its life, observe the following indica-
tions:
when you park the car, ensure the
doors, tailgate and bonnet are closed
properly;
the ceiling lights must be off. The car
is however provided with an auto-
matic system for switching off internal
lights;
do not keep accessories (e.g.: sound
system, hazard lights, etc.) switched on
for a long time when the engine is not
running;
before performing any operation on
the electrical system, disconnect the
battery negative cable;
battery terminals shall always be per-
fectly tightened.
Incorrect fitting of electrical
and electronic accessories can
seriously damage the car. If af-
ter buying the car, you want
to install electric accessories which re-
quire permanent electric supply
(alarm, free-hand phone kit, etc.) con-
tact Fiat Dealership whose qualified
personnel, in addition to suggesting the
most suitable devices, will evaluate the
overall electric absorption, checking
whether the car electric system is ca-
pable of withstanding the load re-
quired, or whether it should be inte-
grated with a more powerful battery.
Batteries contain substances
that are very harmful for the
environment. You are advised
to have the battery changed
at a Fiat Dealership, which is properly
equipped for disposing of used batter-
ies respecting nature and the law.
If the car is left inactive for
long periods at cold, remove
the battery and store it in a warm
place to prevent freezing.
WARNING
When working on the bat-
tery or near it, always wear
the proper goggles.
WARNING
IMPORTANT A battery which is kept at
a charge of less than 50% (optical indica-
tor with dark colour without green area
in the middle) for any length of time will
be damaged by sulphation leading to a re-
duction in cranking power.
Moreover, this might lead to a higher risk
of the battery electrolyte freezing (this
may even occur at -10°C). If the car is in-
active for a long period of time, refer to
“Car inactivity”, in section “Correct use
of the car”.
If after buying the car, you want to install
electric accessories which require per-
manent electric supply (alarm, etc.) con-
tact Fiat Dealership whose qualified per-
sonnel, in addition to suggesting the most
suitable devices, will evaluate the overall
electric absorption, checking whether the
car’s electric system is capable of with-
standing the load required, or whether it
should be integrated with a more power-
ful battery.
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 209
210
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
In fact, since these devices continue ab-
sorbing energy even when the ignition key
is off, they gradually run down the battery.
The total intake of these systems (facto-
ry and after-market) must be less than 0,6
mA x Ah (of the battery) as shown in the
following table:
IMPORTANT NOTES
As far as possible, avoid sharp brak-
ing and screech starts, etc. Be careful
not to hit the kerb, potholes or oth-
er obstacles hard. Driving for long
stretches over bumpy roads can dam-
age the tyres;
Periodically check that the tyres have
no cuts in the side wall, abnormal
swelling or irregular tyre wear. If any
of these occur, have the car seen to at
a Fiat Dealership;
Avoid overloading the car when trav-
elling: this may cause serious damage
to the wheels and tyres;
Battery Maximum
admitted
stand-by intake
70 Ah 42 mA
90 Ah (*) 54 mA
(*) Versions fitted with alarm.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Check the pressure of each tyre, includ-
ing the spare, every two weeks and before
long journeys. The pressure should be
checked with the tyre rested and cold.
For the correct tyre inflation pressure, see
“Wheels” in “Technical specifications”
section.
Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyre
wear:
A normal pressure: tread evenly worn.
B low pressure: tread particularly worn
at the edges.
C high pressure: tread particularly worn
in the centre.
Tyres must be replaced when the tread
wears down to 1.6 mm. In any case, com-
ply with the laws in the country where the
car is being driven.
fig. 17
F0L0159m
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 210
211
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
If a tyre is punctured, stop immediate-
ly and change it to avoid damage to the
tyre, the rim, suspensions and steering
system;
Tyres age even if they are not used
much. Cracks in the tread rubber are
a sign of ageing. In any case, if the tyres
have been on the car for over 6 years,
they should be checked by specialised
personnel, to see if they can still be
used. Also remember to check the
space-saver spare wheel;
In the case of replacement, always fit
new tyres, avoiding those of dubious
origin;
If a tyre is changed, also change the in-
flation valve;
To allow even wear between the front
and rear tyres, it is advisable to change
them over every 10-15 thousand kilo-
metres, keeping them on the same
side of the car so as to not reverse the
direction of rotation.
Remember that road holding
depends also on the correct
tyre inflating pressure.
WARNING
Do not cross switch the
tyres, moving them from the
right of the car to the left and vice
versa.
WARNING
If the pressure is too low the
tyre overheats and this can
cause it serious damage.
WARNING
Never submit alloy rims to
repainting treatments re-
quiring to use temperatures exceed-
ing 150°C since the mechanical prop-
erties of the wheels could be im-
paired.
WARNING
RUBBER HOSES
As far as the brake system and fuel rubber
hoses are concerned, carefully follow the
“Service schedule” in this section.
Indeed ozone, high temperatures and pro-
longed lack of fluid in the system may
cause hardening and cracking of the hoses,
with possible leaks. Careful control is
therefore necessary.
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 211
212
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
Changing the windscreen wiper
blades fig. 18
Proceed as follows:
raise the windscreen wiper arm A and
position the blade so that it forms an
angle of 90° with the arm;
remove the snap fitted blade A from
arm B;
fit the new blade and check it is prop-
erly locked into place.
Changing the rear window blade
fig. 19
Proceed as follows:
raise the cover A and remove the arm
from the car, slackening the nut B that
fastens it to the pivot pin;
fit the new arm, positioning it cor-
rectly, and fully tighten the nut;
lower the cover.
WINDSCREEN/
REAR WINDOW
WIPERS
BLADES
Periodically clean the rubber part using
special products; TUTELA PROFES-
SIONAL SC 35 is recommended.
If the rubber blades are bent or worn they
should be replaced. In any case they should
be changed once a year.
A few simple notions can reduce the pos-
sibility of damage to the blades:
if the temperature fall below zero,
make sure that ice has not frozen the
rubber against glass. If necessary, thaw
using an antifreeze product;
remove any snow from the glass: in ad-
dition to protecting the blades, this
prevents effort on the motor and
overheating;
do not operate the windscreen and
rear window wipers on dry glass.
fig. 18
F0L0203m
Driving with worn wiper
blades is a serious hazard,
because visibility is reduced in bad
weather.
WARNING
fig. 19
F0L0150m
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 212
213
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
Rear window wiper fig. 21
Rear window washer jets can be adjust-
ed in the same way.
The nozzle holder is on the rear window.
HEADLIGHT WASHERS
Regularly check that the spray jets are in-
tact and clean.
The headlight washers are automatically
switched on when the windscreen wash-
er is operated and the headlights are on.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM
ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
The main causes of corrosion are the fol-
lowing:
atmospheric pollution;
salty air and humidity (coastal areas,
or hot humid climates);
seasonal environment conditions.
Not to be underestimated is also the abra-
sive action of wind-borne atmospheric
dust and sand and mud and gravel raised
by other cars.
On your Fiat Croma, Fiat implemented
the best manufacturing technologies to ef-
fectively protect the bodywork against
corrosion.
These include:
Painting products and systems which
give the car particular resistance to
corrosion and abrasion;
Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel
sheets, with high resistance to corro-
sion;
SPRAY NOZZLES
Windscreen wiper fig. 20
If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly check
that there is fluid in the reservoir: see
“Checking fluid levels” in this section).
Then check that the nozzle holes are not
clogged, if necessary use a needle.
Fluid jets shall be directed at about 1/3
height from the window upper edge.
fig. 20
F0L0152m
fig. 21
F0L0151m
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 213
214
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
ADVICE FOR PRESERVING
THE BODYWORK
Paint
Paintwork does not only serve an aesteth-
ic purpose, but also protects the under-
lying sheet metal.
In the case of deep scrapes or scores, you
are advised to have the necessary touch-
ing up carried out immediately to avoid
the formation of rust. Use only original
paint products for touching up (see “Body-
work paint identification plate” in section
“Technical specification”). Normal paint
maintenance consists in washing at inter-
vals depending on the conditions and en-
vironment of use. For example, in highly
polluted areas, or if the roads are sprayed
with salt, it is wise to wash the car more
frequently.
For a correct wash of the vehicle proceed
as follows:
soak the body with a low pressure wa-
ter jet;
pass on the body a sponge with a li-
ght cleansing solution, frequently rin-
sing the sponge;
rinse accurately with water and dry
with air jet or suede.
If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, follow these recommendations:
– remove the antenna from the roof to
avoid damages;
– water with a cleansing solution must be
used for washing;
– rinse accurately to avoid cleansing so-
lution residues which may remain on the
body or hidden parts.
Spraying the underbody, engine com-
partment, wheelhouse internal parts
and other parts with highly protective
wax products;
Spraying of plastic parts, with a pro-
tective function, in the more exposed
points: underdoor, inner fender parts,
edges, etc.;
Use of “open” boxed sections to pre-
vent condensation and pockets of
moisture from triggering rust inside.
BODY AND UNDERBODY
WARRANTY
Your car is covered by warranty against
perforation due to rust of any original el-
ement of the structure or body. For the
general terms of this warranty, refer to
the Fiat Warranty booklet.
When drying, take particular care with the
less visible parts like door surrounds, bon-
net and around the headlights where wa-
ter may stagnate. The car should not be
taken to a closed area immediately, but left
in the open so that residual water can eva-
porate. Do not wash the car after it has
been left in the sun or with the bonnet
hot: this may alter the shine of the
paintwork.
Some automatic systems pro-
vided with old generation
and/or not correctly maintai-
ned brushes may damage the
varnish, easing the creation of micro-
scratches, especially on dark colours.
To remove those scratches, slightly po-
lish with a specific product.
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 214
215
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
Windows
Use specific window cleaner products.
Use also clean cloths to avoid scratching
the glass or damaging the transparency.
IMPORTANT The inside of the
rearscreen should be wiped gently with a
cloth in the direction of the filaments to
avoid damaging the heating device.
Engine compartment
At the end of the winter the engine com-
partment should be carefully washed,
without directing the jet against electron-
ic control units. Contact a specialised
workshop to have this done.
IMPORTANT The car should be washed
with the engine cold and the ignition key
at OFF. After washing make sure that the
various protections (e.g. rubber caps and
various covers) have not been damaged or
removed.
INTERIORS
Periodically check that water is not
trapped under the mats (due to water
dripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.) which
could cause oxidisation of the sheet met-
al.
CLEANING SEATS AND FABRIC
AND VELVET PARTS
Use a soft brush or vacuum cleaner to re-
move dust. Velvet is cleaned better if the
brush is moistened.
Rub the seats with a sponge moistened
with a solution of water and neutral de-
tergent.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
Remove dried on dirt with lightly moist-
ened chamois leather or cloth without
pressing too hard.
Remove liquid or grease stains with a dry
absorbent cloth without rubbing. Then
wipe with a soft cloth or chamois leather
with water and neutral soap.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in
the same way as the rest of the car.
Where possible, do not park under trees;
the resinous substance many species re-
lease give the paint a dull appearance and
increase the possibility of triggering rust
processes.
IMPORTANT Bird droppings must be
washed off immediately and thoroughly as
the acid they contain is particularly ag-
gressive.
Detergents cause water pollu-
tion. Therefore the car should
be washed in areas equipped
for collecting and purifying the
liquid used in the washing process.
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 215
216
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
STEERING WHEEL/GEAR LEVER
KNOB WITH GENUINE
LEATHER COVERING
These components shall only be cleaned
with water and neutral soap. Never use
spirit or alcohol-based products.
Before using special products for clean-
ing interiors, read carefully label instruc-
tions and indications to make sure they
are free from spirit and/or alcohol-based
substances.
If when cleaning the windscreen with spe-
cial glass products, some drops fall on the
leather covering of the steering wheel/gear
lever knob remove them immediately and
then clean with water and neutral soap.
IMPORTANT Take the utmost care when
engaging the steering lock to prevent
scratching the leather covering.
INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS
Use appropriate products designed to
preserve the appearance of components.
IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petro-
leum to clean the instrument panel.
If the stain persists, use specific products,
carefully following the instructions for use.
IMPORTANT Never use spirit or alcohol-
based products.
Never use flammable prod-
ucts like oil ether or rectified
petrol for cleaning car interiors. Elec-
trostatic discharges generated by rub-
bing during cleaning operations could
cause fire.
WARNING
Do not keep aerosol cans in
the car: they might explode.
Aerosol cans must never be exposed
to a temperature above 50°C. The
temperature inside the car exposed
to the sun may go well beyond that
figure.
WARNING
193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:16 Pagina 216
217
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA ................................................. 218
ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS............... 220
ENGINE .................................................................................. 221
FUEL FEED/IGNITION ....................................................... 223
TRANSMISSION .................................................................. 223
BRAKES ................................................................................... 224
SUSPENSIONS....................................................................... 224
STEERING............................................................................... 224
WHEELS .................................................................................. 225
DIMENSIONS......................................................................... 230
PERFORMANCE ................................................................... 231
WEIGHTS ............................................................................... 232
CAPACITIES........................................................................... 234
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.............................................. 236
FUEL CONSUMPTION ....................................................... 238
CO
2
EMISSIONS .................................................................. 240
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL:
MINISTERIAL CERTIFICATIONS .................................... 241
TT
T
E
E
C
C
H
H
N
N
I
I
C
C
A
A
L
L
S
S
P
P
E
E
C
C
I
I
F
F
I
I
C
C
A
A
T
T
I
I
O
O
N
N
S
S
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 217
I Engine type.
L Body version code.
M Spare part code.
N Smoke opacity index (for diesel en-
gines).
IDENTIFICATION DATA
You are advised to note the identification
codes. The identification data stamped and
given on the plates and their position are
the following:
Model plate
Chassis marking
Bodywork paint identification plate
Engine marking.
218
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL PLATE fig. 1
This is mounted on the left in the engine
compartment and states the following
identification data:
B Homologation number.
C Vehicle type code.
D Chassis number.
E Maximum vehicle weight fully loaded.
F Maximum vehicle weight fully loaded
with trailer.
G Maximum vehicle weight on front axle.
H Maximum vehicle weight on rear axle.
fig. 1
F0L0415m
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 218
CHASSIS MARKING fig. 2
It is printed on the passenger compart-
ment floor, near the right-hand front seat.
It can be reached by lifting the special flap
in the carpeting and includes the following
data:
car model;
chassis number.
ENGINE MARKING
Engine marking is stamped on the cylinder
block and includes the model and the
chassis number.
BODYWORK PAINT
IDENTIFICATION PLATE fig. 3
The plate is applied inside the bonnet and
it bears the following data:
A Paint manufacturer.
B Colour name.
C Fiat colour code.
D Respray and touch up code.
219
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
fig. 2
F0L0204m
fig. 3
F0L0161m
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 219
220
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS
Engine code Body version Body version (**)
1.8 939A4000 194AXG1A 08C 194AXG1A 08D
2.2 194A1000 194AXA1A 00C 194AXA1A 00D
2.2 a.t. 194A1000 194AXA12 01C 194AXA12 01D
1.9 Multijet 8V
(with DPF)
939A1000 194AXB1B 02C 194AXB1B 02E
1.9 Multijet 8V (without DPF)
939A1000 194AXB1B 02D 194AXB1B 02F
1.9 Multijet 8V
(with DPF) (
*
)
939A1000 194BXB1B CX 194BXB1B EX
1.9 Multijet 8V
(without DPF) (
*
)
939A1000 194BXB1B DX 194BXB1B FX
1.9 Multijet
8V
120 HP pur-O
2
939A1000 194AXB1B 02G -
1.9 Multijet 8V 115 HP (
*
)
939A7000 194AXE1B 06B 194AXE1B 06C
1.9 Multijet 8V 115 HP (
*
)
pur-O
2
939A7000 194AXB1B 06D -
1.9 Multijet 16V
(with DPF)
939A2000 194AXC1B 03E 194AXC1B 03G
1.9 Multijet 16V (without DPF)
939A2000 194AXC1B 03F 194AXC1B 03H
1.9 Multijet 16V a.t.
(with DPF)
939A2000 194AXC12 04B 194AXC12 04C
1.9 Multijet 16V
(with DPF) (
*
)
939A2000 194BXC1B CX 194BXC1B EX
1.9 Multijet 16V (without DPF) (
*
)
939A2000 194BXC12 BX 194BXC1B FX
1.9 Multijet 16V a.t.
(with DPF) (
*
)
939A2000 194BXC1B DX 194BXC12 CX
1.9 Multijet 16V 135 HP (*) 939A8000 194AXF1B 07C 194AXF1B 07D
1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 135 HP (*) 939A8000 194AXF12 09B 194AXF12 09C
2.4 Multijet 20V a.t.
(with DPF)
939A3000 194AXD12 05B 194AXD12 05B
(*) Versions for specific markets.
(**) Body codes for versions/markets where provided.
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 220
221
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
1.8 2.2 2.2 a.t.
GENERAL FEATURES
Engine code
Cycle
Number and layout of cylinders
Piston bore and stroke mm
Total displacement cm
3
Compression ratio
Maximum power (EEC) kW
HP
corresponding ratio rpm
Maximum torque (EEC) Nm
kgm
corresponding ratio rpm
Spark plugs
Fuel
939A4000
Otto
4 in line
80.5 x 88.2
1796
10.5 : 1
103
140
6300
175
17.8
3800
BOSCH FQR 8 LEU2
Unleaded
petrol 95 RON
(Specification EN228)
194A1000
Otto
4 in line
86 x 94.6
2198
10.0 : 1
108
147
5800
203
20.7
4000
AC DELCO HLR8STEX
Unleaded
petrol 95 RON
(Specification EN228)
194A1000
Otto
4 in line
86 x 94.6
2198
10.0 : 1
108
147
5800
203
20.7
4000
AC DELCO HLR8STEX
Unleaded
petrol 95 RON
(Specification EN228)
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 221
222
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL FEATURES
Engine code
Cycle
Number and layout of cylinders
Piston bore and stroke mm
Total displacement cm
3
Compression ratio
Maximum power (EEC) kW
HP
corresponding ratio rpm
Maximum torque (EEC) Nm
kgm
corresponding ratio rpm
Fuel
(*) Versions for specific markets
1.9 Multijet 8V
939A1000
Diesel
4 in line
82 x 90.4
1910
18.0 : 1
88 (85*)
120 (115*)
4000
280
28.6
2000
Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles
(Specification EN590)
1.9 Multijet
16V
939A2000
Diesel
4 in line
82 x 90.4
1910
17.5 : 1
110 (100*)
150 (135*)
4000
320
32.6
2000
Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles
(Specification EN590)
1.9 Multijet
16V a.t.
939A2000
Diesel
4 in line
82 x 90.4
1910
17.5 : 1
110 (100*)
150 (135*)
4000
320
32.6
2000
Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles
(Specification EN590)
2.4 Multijet
20V a.t.
939A3000
Diesel
5 in line
82 x 90.4
2387
17.0 : 1
147
200
4000
400
40.8
2000
Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles
(Specification EN590)
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 222
223
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Multipoint electronic injection
Direct injection with electronically controlled
Multijet “Common Rail”,
turbosupercharger and intercooler
Modifications or repairs to the fuel system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system’s tech-
nical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.
WARNING
TRANSMISSION
1.8 - 2.2 2.2 a.t. 1.9 Multijet 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t.
2.4 Multijet 20V a.t.
Gearbox
Drive
5 forward gears
+ Reverse
front
automatic 5 forward
gears +
Reverse and tip
front
6 forward gears
+ Reverse
front
automatic
6 forward gears
+ Reverse and tip
front
FUEL FEED/IGNITION
1.8 - 2.2 Multijet
Fuel feed
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 223
224
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Disc, self-ventilating
Disc, self-ventilating
Controlled by hand lever,
it works on rear brakes
BRAKES
1.8 - 2.2 - 1.9 Multijet 8V 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t.
1.9 Multijet 16V
Service brakes:
– front
– rear
Parking brake
IMPORTANT Water, ice and antifreeze salt on roads may deposit on the brake discs thus reducing braking efficiency at first brak-
ing.
SUSPENSIONS
1.8 - 2.2 - Multijet
Front
Rear
McPherson independent wheels
Multilink independent wheels
Disc, self-ventilating
Disc
Controlled by hand lever,
it works on rear brakes
STEERING
1.8 - 2.2 - Multijet 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t.
Type
Minimum steering
cycle m
Electro-hydraulic power steering
11,45
Electro-hydraulic power steering
11,80
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 224
SPACE-SAVER SPARE WHEEL
Pressed steel rim. Tubeless tyre.
WHEEL GEOMETRY
In order to guarantee the correct regula-
tion and stability of the vehicle, please con-
tact the Fiat Assistance Network.
UNDERSTANDING TYRE
MARKING fig. 4
Example: 205/55 R 16 91 V
205 = Nominal width (S, distance be-
tween sidewalls in mm).
55 = Percentage height/width ratio (H/
S).
R = Radial tyre.
16 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø).
91 = Load rating (capacity).
V = Maximum speed rating.
WHEELS
RIMS AND TYRES
Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless tyres
with radial carcass. The homologated tyres
are listed in the Log book.
IMPORTANT In the event of discrepan-
cies between the information provided on
this “Owner handbook” and the “Log
book”, consider the specifications shown
in the log book only.
Attaining to the prescribed size, to ensure
safety of the car in movement, it must be
fitted with tyres of the same make and
type on all wheels.
IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubes
with Tubeless tyres.
225
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
fig. 4
F0L0162m
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 225
Maximum speed rating
Q = up to 160 km/h.
R = up to 170 km/h.
S = up to 180 km/h.
T = up to 190 km/h.
U = up to 200 km/h.
H = up to 210 km/h.
V = up to 240 km/h.
W = up to 270 km/h.
Y = up to 300 km/h.
Maximum speed rating
for snow tyres
QM + S = up to 160 km/h.
TM + S = up to 190 km/h.
HM + S = up to 210 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING RIM
MARKING
Example: 6 1/2 J x 16 H2 ET41
6 1/2 = rim width in inches (1).
J = rim drop center outline (side
projection where the tyre bead
rests) (2).
16 = rim nominal diameter in inches
(corresponds to diameter of the
tyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø).
H2 = “hump” shape and number (re-
lief on the circumference hold-
ing the Tubeless tyre bead on
the rim).
ET 41 = wheel camber angle (distance
between the disc/rim supporting
plane and the wheel rim centre
line).
Load rating (capacity)
60 = 250 kg 84 = 500 kg
61 = 257 kg 85 = 515 kg
62 = 265 kg 86 = 530 kg
63 = 272 kg 87 = 545 kg
64 = 280 kg 88 = 560 kg
65 = 290 kg 89 = 580 kg
66 = 300 kg 90 = 600 kg
67 = 307 kg 91 = 615 kg
68 = 315 kg 92 = 630 kg
69 = 325 kg 93 = 650 kg
70 = 335 kg 94 = 670 kg
71 = 345 kg 95 = 690 kg
72 = 355 kg 96 = 710 kg
73 = 365 kg 97 = 730 kg
74 = 375 kg 98 = 750 kg
75 = 387 kg
99 = 775 kg
76 = 400 kg 100 = 800 kg
77 = 412 kg 101 = 825 kg
78 = 425 kg 102 = 850 kg
79 = 437 kg 103 = 875 kg
80 = 450 kg 104 = 900 kg
81 = 462 kg 105 = 925 kg
82 = 475 kg 106 = 950 kg
83 = 487 kg
226
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 226
227
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
VERSIONS RIMS (*) TYRES Space-saver spare wheel
Standard tyres Snow tyres Rim Tyre
1.8 6.5J x 16” - ET 36/41 205/55 R16 91V 205/55 R16 91 H (M+S)
6.5J x 16” - ET 36/41 215/55 R16 93W 215/55 R16 93 H (M+S) 4J 16 - 41 115/70 R16 92M
7J x 17” - ET 36/41 215/50 R17 91W 215/50 R17 91 H (M+S)
2.2-2.2 a.t. 6.5J x 16” - ET 36/41 205/55 R16 91V 205/55 R16 91 H (M+S)
6.5J x 16” - ET 36/41 215/55 R16 93W 215/55 R16 93 H (M+S)
7J x 17” - ET 36/41 215/50 R17 91W 215/50 R17 91 H (M+S)
4J 16 - 41 115/70 R16 92M
7.5J x 18” - ET 36/41 225/45 R18 95W (Ô) 225/45 R18 95 H (M+S)
1.9 Multijet
8V 6.5J x 16” - ET 36/41 205/55 R16 91V 205/55 R16 91 H (M+S)
1.9 Multijet
16V 6.5J x 16” - ET 36/41 215/55 R16 93W 215/55 R16 93 H (M+S)
1.9 Multijet 16V a.t.
7J x 17” - ET 36/41 215/50 R17 91W 215/50 R17 91 H (M+S)
4J 16 - 41 115/70 R16 92M
7.5J x 18” - ET 36/41 225/45 R18 95W (Ô) 225/45 R18 95 H (M+S)
1.9 Multijet 8V
6,5J x 16” - ET 36/41 205/55 R16 91V 205/55 R16 91 H (M+S) 4J 16-41 115/70 R16 92M
pur-O
2
(**)
2.4 Multijet 20V a.t.
7J x 17” - ET 36/41 215/50 R17 95W 215/50 R17 91 H (M+S)
4J 16 - 41 115/70 R16 92M
7.5J x 18” - ET 36/41 225/45 R18 95W (Ô) 225/45 R18 95 H (M+S)
(Ô) Tyres that cannot be fitted with snow chains
(*) ET 41 value referred to the rims available on the accessory line.
(**) Other size tyres are not type approved for these versions.
Note: rims with the same ET are to be used on the vehicle.
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 227
228
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)
Petrol versions
STANDARD TYRES Space-aver
Size Medium load Full load spare wheel
Front Rear Front Rear
205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
1.8 215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 4.2
215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.6
205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.8 2.7
215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5
2.2
215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
4.2
225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5
2.2 a.t.
215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5
4.2
225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5
Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.
If travelling at a speed higher than 160 km/h, inflate tyres at the values specified for fully laden conditions.
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 228
229
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Multijet versions
STANDARD TYRES Space-saver
Size Medium load Full load spare wheel
Front Rear Front Rear
205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5
1.9 Multijet
8V
215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5
4.2
225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5
205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.8 2.7
215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5
1.9 Multijet
16V
215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
4.2
225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5
205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
1.9 Multijet
16V
215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5
a.t.
215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
4.2
225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5
2.4 Multijet
20V
215/50 R17 95W 2.6 2.5 2.9 2.7
4.2
a.t.
225/45 R18 95W 2.6 2.5 2.8 2.6
Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.
If travelling at a speed higher than 160 km/h, inflate tyres at the values specified for fully laden conditions.
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 229
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions are expressed in mm and re-
fer to the car fitted with standard tyres.
The height refers to the car unladen.
Boot volume
Unladen boot volume
(V.D.A. standards)
500 dm
3
Extended boot volume
(with folded seat back)
893 dm
3
230
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Versions A B C D E F G H
1.8 - 2.2 - 2.2 c.a.
1.9 Multijet 8V
4783 1046 2700 1037
1603 (*)
1524 (
) 1775 1505 (
)
1.9 Multijet 16V 1593 ()
2.4 Multijet 20V c.a.
(*) 1623 with roof racks; track measurements may vary according to rim size.
(
) On ground with 3 passengers.
() Versions pur-O
2
;
1613 mm with roof rack bars.
A
CB D
E
F
G
H
fig. 5
F0L0536m
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 230
231
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
PERFORMANCE
Top admitted speed after initial car use in km/h.
PETROL VERSIONS
1.8 2.2 2.2 a.t.
206 210 205
MULTIJET VERSIONS
1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t.
195 210 205 (200*) 216
(*) Versions for specific markets
1.9 Multijet 120 HP pur-O
2
1.9 Multijet 115 HP pur-O
2
197 194
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 231
232
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
1.8
1430
520
1100
1030
1950
1500
700
80
70
2.2
1510
520
1100
1030
2030
1500
700
80
70
2.2 a.t.
1530
520
1100
1030
2050
1500
700
80
70
WEIGHTS
Weights (kg)
Kerb weight (including all fluids,
fuel tank at 90% and with no optional)
Payload (*) including the driver:
Maximum admitted loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
Towable loads
– trailer with brakes:
– trailer without brakes:
Maximum load on roof (***):
Maximum load on tow hitch
(trailer with brakes):
(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases
thus reducing the specified payload.
(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads in the boot an/or on the roof so that they com-
ply with these limits.
(***) Lineaccessori Fiat roof rack, max capacity: 50 kg.
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 232
233
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
1.9 Multijet 8V
1520
520
1150
1030
2040
1500
700
80
70
1.9 Multijet
16V
1530
520
1150
1030
2050
1500
700
80
70
1.9 Multijet
16V a.t.
1540
520
1150
1030
2060
1500
700
80
70
2.4 Multijet 20V a.t.
1650
520
1200
1030
2170
1500
700
80
70
Weights (kg)
Kerb weight (including all fluids,
fuel tank at 90% and with no optional)
Payload (*)
including the driver:
Maximum admitted
loads (**)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
Towable loads
– trailer with brakes:
– trailer without brakes:
Maximum load on roof (***):
Maximum load on tow hitch
(trailer with brakes):
(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases
thus reducing the specified payload.
(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads in the boot an/or on the roof so that they com-
ply with these limits.
(***) Lineaccessori Fiat roof rack, max capacity: 50 kg.
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 233
234
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
CAPACITIES
Fuel tank:
including a reserve of:
Engine cooling system
– with climate control:
Engine sump and filter:
Mechanical gearbox and
differential:
Automatic transmission
Hydraulic brake circuit
with ABS:
Electrohydraulic power
steering circuit:
Windscreen/rear window
/headlight washer fluid reservoir: (*)
(*) The values in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers.
() For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralized water mixture.
(
) Total quantity of oil in the gearbox.
1.8
litres kg
62
7 - 9
7.4
4.5
1.6 1.3
––
0.750
0.7 0.59
3 (5)
2.2
litres kg
62
7 - 9
7.4
5–
1.8 1.5
––
0.750
0.9 0.75
3 (5)
2.2 a.t.
litres kg
62
7 - 9
7.4
5–
––
6.400(
)
0.750
0.9 0.75
3 (5)
Recommended products and
genuine lubricants
Unleaded petrol
with no less than 95 R.O.N
(EN228 Specification)
Mixture of 50% demineralised wa-
ter and 50% PARAFLU UP
()
SELENIA K P.E.
TUTELA CAR MATRIX
TUTELA GI/V
TUTELA TOP 4
TUTELA GI/R
TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 234
235
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel tank:
including a reserve of:
Engine cooling
system
– with climate control:
Engine sump and filter:
Mechanical gearbox and
differential:
Automatic transmission
Hydraulic brake circuit
with ABS:
Electrohydraulic power
steering circuit:
Windscreen/rear window/
headlight washer
fluid reservoir: (*)
(*) The values in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers.
() For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralized water mixture.
(
) Total quantity of oil in the gearbox.
() Versions pur-O
2
.
Recommended products and
genuine lubricants
Diesel fuel for motor vehicles
(Specification EN 590)
Mixture of 50% demineralised
water and 50% PARAFLU UP
SELENIA WR/WR P.E. (
)
TUTELA CAR MATRIX
TUTELA GI/VI
TUTELA TOP 4
TUTELA GI/R
TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35
1.9 Multijet
8V
litres kg
62
7 - 9
7.7
4.5
1.9 1.6
––
0.750
0.7 0.59
3 (5)
1.9 Multijet
16V
litres kg
62
7 - 9
7.7
4.5
1.9 1.6
––
0.750
0.7 0.59
3 (5)
1.9 Multijet
16V a.t.
litres kg
62
7 - 9
7.7
4.5
––
6.110()
0.750
0.7 0.59
3 (5)
2.4 Multijet
20V a.t.
litres kg
62
7 - 9
8.4
5.4
––
6.110()
0.750
0.7 0.59
3 (5)
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 235
236
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
For diesel versions, in the case of emergency when original products are not available, lubricants with a minimum performance of
ACEA B4 are acceptable; in this case, optimal engine performance is not guaranteed and it is recommended to have them replaced
with a recommended lubricant as soon as possible at the Fiat Service Network.
The use of products with inferior characteristics compared to ACEA C3 and ACEA B4 could cause damage, not covered by the
guarantee, to the engine.
For particularly rigid climatic conditions ask the Fiat Dealership for the appropriate product from the Selenia range.
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS
Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Genuine fluids Change
for correct car operation and lubricants intervals
Oils for petrol
engines
Oils for diesel
engines
As per Service
Schedule
As per Service
Schedule
SELENIA K P.E.
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F603.C07
SELENIA WR
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F515.D06
SELENIA WR P.E.
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F510.D07
Synthetic-based oils, grade SAE 5W-40 ACEA C3.
FIAT 9.55535-S2 qualification.
Synthetic-based oils, grade SAE 5W-40
FIAT 9.55535- N2 qualification.
Synthetic-based oils, grade SAE 5W-30
Qualification FIAT 9.55535- S1
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 236
237
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Lubricants
and greases for
transmissions
Protective
agent
for radiators
Windscreen/
rear window/
headlight
washer fluid
Brake
fluid
Additive for
diesel fuel
Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-85 that passes API GL-4
specifications
Special lubricant for 5 seed automatic transmissions with limited
slip torque converter.
Specification FIAT 9.55550-AV1
Special lubricant for 6 speed automatic transmissionswith limited
slip torque converter.
Specification FIAT 9.55550-AV2
Specifc grease to be used for constant-velocity joints with low
friction coefficient. N.L.G.I. 0-1 consistency.
Grease containing Molybdenum bisulphide for high temperature
appliances. N.L.G.I. 1-2 consistency.
Synthetic fluid for hydraulic and electrohydraulic systems.
Specification FIAT 9.55550-AG3
Synthetic fluid, FMVSS n° 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925 SAE J1704,
CUNA NC 956-01
Protective with antifreeze action, red colour based on inhibited
monoethylen glycol and organic formula, that passes
CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications.
Additive for diesel fuels with protective action for Diesel engines
Mixture of alcohol and surfactants CUNA NC 956-11
Mechanical gearbox
and differential
5 speed automatic gearboxes
6 speed automatic gearboxes
CV joints on differential side
CV joints on wheel side
Electrohydraulic
power steering
Brake and clutch hydraulic
controls
Radiator antifreeze
proportion:
50% distilled water and
50% PARAFLU UP ()
To be used diluted
or undiluted
To be mixed with diesel fuel
(25 cc per 10 litres)
TUTELA CAR
MATRYX
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F108.F02
TUTELA CAR GI/V
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F333.I05
TUTELA CAR GI/VI
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F336.G05
TUTELA STAR 700
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F701.C07
TUTELA ALL STAR
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F702.G07
TUTELA CAR GI/R
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F428.H04
TUTELA TOP 4
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F001.A93
PARAFLU UP ()
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F101.M01
TUTELA DIESEL ART
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F601.L06
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35
Contractual Technical
Reference N. F201.D02
Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Genuine fluids Applications
for correct car operation and lubricants
() IMPORTANT Do not add or mix fluids having different specifications from that already existing.
() For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralized water mixture.
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 237
extra-urban cycle: frequent accel-
erating in all gears, simulating extrau-
rban use of the car; the speed varies
between 0 and 120 km/h;
combined consumption: is calcu-
lated weighing about 37% of urban cy-
cle consumption and about 63% of
extraurban consumption.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
The fuel consumption figures given in the
table below are determined on the basis
of the homologation tests set down by
specific European Directives.
The procedures below are followed for
measuring consumption:
urban cycle: cold starting followed
by driving that simulates urban use of
the car;
238
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic
situations, weather conditions, driving
style, general conditions of the car, trim
level/equipment/accessories, load, climate
control system, roof rack, other situations
that affect air drag may lead to different
fuel consumption levels than those mea-
sured.
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 238
239
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel consumption according to Directive 2004/3/EC (litres x 100 km)
Petrol versions
1.8 2.2 2.2 a.t.
Urban 9.8 9.7 (*) 11.4 11.3 (*) 12.5 12.2 (*)
Extra-urban 6.0 6.0 (*) 6.7 6.7 (*) 7.6 7.6 (*)
Combined 7.4 7.4 (*) 8.4 8.4 (*) 9.4 9.3 (*)
Multijet versions
1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t.
Urban 7.9 7.7 (*) 8.1 8.1 (*) 9.3 9.1 (*) 10.3 10.3 (*)
Extra-urban 5.0 5.0 (*) 4.9 4.7 (*) 5.8 5.6 (*) 5.4 5.4 (*)
Combined 6.1 6.0 (*) 6.1 6.0 (*) 7.1 6.9 (*) 7.2 7.2 (*)
(*) Values applicable to body codes for versions/markets where provided.
1.9 Multijet 120 HP pur-O
2
1.9 Multijet 115 HP pur-O
2
Urban 6,9 6,9
Extra urban 4,4 4,4
Combined 5,3 5,3
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 239
240
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Multijet versions
1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t.
160 157 (*) 160 157 (*) 187 181 (*) 191 191 (*)
(*) Values applicable to body codes for versions/markets where provided.
CO
2
EMISSIONS
The CO
2
, emission levels at the exhaust given in the following table refer to combined consumption.
CO
2
emissions according to 2004/3/EC Directive (g/km)
Petrol versions
1.8 2.2 2.2 a.t.
175 173 (*) 199 198 (*) 222 219 (*)
1.9 Multijet 120 HP pur-O
2
1.9 Multijet 115 HP pur-O
2
140 140
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 240
241
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Certification number
T194 NTR194
European Union and
Countries applying
EC directive
Morocco
South Africa
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: Ministerial Certifications
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
MR 2061 ANRT 2005 le 03/06/2005
Désignation : Emetteur
Marque / type : TRW / T194
Constructeur / Pays : TRW Automotive Italia SPA / Italy
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
MR 2062 ANRT 2005 le 03/06/2005
Désignation : Emetteur / recepteur
Marque / type : TRW / NTR194
Constructeur / Pays : TRW Automotive Italia SPA / Italy
TA-2005/817
APPROVATED
TA-2005/816
APPROVATED
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 241
242
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
217-242 Croma TRW GB 10-11-2008 13:16 Pagina 242
243
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IINDEX
Boot hatch............................................. 84
– emergency opening ....................... 85
Boot light............................................... 180
Boot........................................................ 84
– baggage cover shade ..................... 87
– double load compartment........... 88
– emergency opening ....................... 85
– enlargement.................................... 85
– load anchoring................................ 89
– opening and closing....................... 84
– repositioning the rear seat .......... 88
Brake Assist (emergency braking
assistance) .......................................... 87
Brake fluid
– insufficient brake liquid warning
light................................................... 146
– level check....................................... 206
Brakes
– brake pad wear warning light...... 156
– characteristics ................................ 224
– Hill Holder failure warning light. 154
– liquid level ....................................... 206
Car radio.............................................. 100
– antenna ........................................... 101
– audio system .................................. 100
– Hi-Fi system ................................... 101
Car seats (suitability of use).............. 115
Ceiling lights
– boot ceiling light lamp
replacement.................................... 180
– central light ..................................... 70
– courtesy lights ................................ 70
– courtesy mirror ceiling light lamp
replacement.................................... 179
– door clearance/puddle ceiling
light lamp replacement ................. 180
– front ................................................. 70
– front ceiling light lamp
replacement.................................... 178
– glove compartment ceiling light
lamp replacement.......................... 179
– rear .................................................. 70
– side rear ceiling light lamp
replacement.................................... 181
Changing a lamp................................... 169
Changing a wheel................................. 159
Chassis (marking)................................. 219
Child safety device............................... 81
Cigar lighter .......................................... 76
CO
2
emissions ..................................... 240
Code Card ............................................ 10
Constant speed regulator
(Cruise Control) .............................. 68
Consumption
– engine oil ......................................... 204
– fuel........................................... 238-239
Courtesy mirror
– ceiling light lamp replacement..... 179
Courtesy mirror ceiling lights........... 179
Cruise Control (constant speed
regulator) ........................................... 68
– constant speed regulator warning
light (Cruise Control) ................. 156
ABS ...................................................... 94
– ABS system failure warning light 148
ABS system ........................................... 94
Additional heater................................. 61
Air bag
– air bag failure warning light.......... 146
Air filter (replacement) ...................... 207
Alarm...................................................... 14
– alarm failure warning light ........... 151
– break-in attempt warning light ... 151
Antenna ................................................ 101
Antilifting (protection)........................ 15
Ashtray (front/rear) ............................ 77
ASR system ........................................... 97
ASR......................................................... 97
Automatic air conditioner ................. 52
Automatic headlamp sensor
(twilight sensor) ................................ 64
Backing light......................................... 176
Battery
– battery recharging ......................... 190
– checking the charge status........... 208
– insufficient battery recharge
warning light ................................... 148
– replacing the battery..................... 208
– startup with an auxiliary battery 158
– useful advice for extending
battery life....................................... 209
Body
– maintenance.................................... 213
– version codes ................................. 220
II
I
N
N
D
D
E
E
X
X
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 243
244
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
– excessive temperature warning
light................................................... 148
– level check....................................... 204
Engine cooling system liquid level .... 204
Engine hood .......................................... 90
Engine oil
– characteristics ................................ 236
– consumption................................... 204
– degraded oil warning light ........... 149
– insufficient engine oil pressure
warning light ................................... 149
– level check....................................... 203
– minimum engine oil level warning
light................................................... 156
Engine oil level...................................... 203
Environmental protection.................. 105
EOBD (system) .................................... 98
EOBD system....................................... 98
ESP (system) ......................................... 96
ESP system ............................................ 96
– ESP system failure warning light. 154
Exterior lamp replacement................ 173
Exterior lights
– control ............................................. 62
– exterior lights failure warning
light................................................... 152
Fiat CODE (system) .......................... 9
– electronic key not recognised
warning light ................................... 151
– vehicle protection system failure
warning light ................................... 151
Fiat CODE system............................... 9
Fix & go automatic
(rapid tyre repair kit) ...................... 165
Flashing................................................... 63
Fog light
– orientation ...................................... 94
Follow me home (device) .................. 64
Front air bags........................................ 118
– front driver’s side air bag............. 119
– front passenger’s side air bag...... 120
– driver’s side knee air bag ............. 120
– general warnings............................ 124
– turning off the passenger side
front and side chest protection
air bags (Side Bags) ...................... 121
– passenger side front and side
chest protection air bag warnings
light (Side Bag) off ........................ 147
Front armrest with storage box
and cooled compartment................ 74
Front ceiling lights
– control ............................................. 70
– lamp replacement.......................... 178
Front fog lights
– control ............................................. 71
– fog lights warning light.................. 154
– lamp replacement.......................... 175
Front optical units
– lamp replacement.......................... 173
Fuel
– consumption................................... 238
– fuel block switch ........................... 72
– fuel reserve warning light ........... 150
– level indicator................................. 21
– saving fuel ....................................... 138
Fuel block switch and electric power
supply ................................................. 72
Fuel hatch .............................................. 104
Cup holder compartments................ 76
Cup/can holder .................................... 76
Dashboard and controls ................... 4
Dead lock (device) .............................. 16
Diesel filter
– condensate water drain ............... 207
– water in diesel filter warning
light................................................... 151
Diesel Particulate Filter ..................... 106
Dimensions ........................................... 230
Door clearance/puddle light.............. 180
Doors..................................................... 81
– centralized closing ......................... 81
– child safety device.......................... 81
– emergency closing ......................... 13
– emergency opening ....................... 13
– incomplete door closure
warning light ................................... 149
EBD (system)
– EBD system failure warning light 148
Electric socket...................................... 77
Electric window regulators
– controls ........................................... 82
Emergency lights .................................. 71
Engine
– identification code......................... 220
– marking ............................................ 219
– typical data ...................................... 221
Engine compartment (washing) ........ 215
Engine coolant temperature indicator 21
Engine cooling system liquid
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 244
245
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IINDEX
Identification data................................ 218
Ignition device....................................... 19
In an emergency................................... 157
Injection system
– EOBD engine control system
failure warning light....................... 149
– injection system failure warning
light................................................... 149
Instrument dashboard......................... 5
Instrument panel.................................. 6
Interior equipment .............................. 74
Interiors
– maintenance.................................... 215
Isofix Universal (car seat) .................. 117
“Isofix Universale” car seat ............... 117
– installation presetting.................... 117
– suitability of use ............................. 118
Keys....................................................... 10
– emergency key.................................. 13
– key with remote control ................ 11
Lamps (replacement)
– exterior lamp replacement.......... 173
– general information....................... 169
– interior lamp replacement........... 178
– lamp types....................................... 170
Level checks.......................................... 198
Levels
– level checks..................................... 198
License plate lights
– lamp replacement.......................... 178
3rd stop lights....................................... 177
Liquids and lubricants ......................... 236
Load (anchoring).................................. 89
Long vehicle inactivity......................... 144
Low beams
– control ............................................. 62
– Follow Me Home........................... 154
– lamp replacement.......................... 173
– low beam light warning light ....... 154
Lubricants.............................................. 236
Maintenance and care
– Demanding vehicle use................. 197
– periodical checks ........................... 197
– planned maintenance .................... 194
– Scheduled Maintenance Plan ....... 195
Manual air conditioner........................ 49
Maximum speed................................... 231
Money holder ....................................... 76
Multifunctional display ....................... 22
– control buttons.............................. 22
– display functions............................. 28
– setup menu .................................... 23
– standard screen.............................. 22
On board instruments....................... 20
Paint (maintenance) ........................... 214
Parking brake........................................ 131
– parking brake engaged warning
light-.................................................. 146
Parking lights......................................... 72
Parking sensors .................................... 102
Parking.................................................... 131
– parking brake.................................. 131
Passenger compartment air
diffusers............................................... 48
Fuel level indicator .............................. 21
Fuel reserve
– fuel reserve warning light ........... 150
Fuel tank plug........................................ 104
Fuses
– fuse replacement ........................... 181
– fuse table ......................................... 186
Generic warning light ........................ 152
Glasses holder...................................... 76
Glove compartment light................... 179
Glove compartment............................ 75
– ceiling light lamp replacement..... 179
Head rests
– front ................................................. 42
– rear .................................................. 42
Headlamps............................................. 93
– headlamp adjustment overseas... 94
– headlamp stability corrector....... 93
– light beam orientation .................. 93
Headlight washer-wiper
– control ............................................. 67
– liquid level ....................................... 205
Heated rear window
– heated rear window warning
light................................................... 151
Heating and air conditioning ............. 47
Heating/air conditioning system ....... 47
High-beam headlights
– control ............................................. 62
– flashing ............................................. 63
– high beam light warning light....... 155
– lamp replacement.......................... 174
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 245
Rear fog light......................................... 72
– rear fog light warning light........... 152
Rear optical units
– fixed side optical unit.................... 176
– lamp replacement.......................... 175
– optical unit on boot hatch........... 175
Rear sunshade curtains....................... 78
Rear view mirrors
– electrochromic interior .............. 44
– exterior .......................................... 44
– interior ........................................... 44
Rear window washer-wiper
– control ............................................. 67
– liquid level ....................................... 205
Rear window wiper
– brush ................................................ 212
– control ............................................. 67
– sprayers ........................................... 213
Reconfigurable multifunctional
display ................................................. 25
– control buttons.............................. 25
– display functions............................. 28
– setup menu .................................... 25
– standard screen.............................. 26
Refuelling ............................................... 234
Regulations for vehicle handling at
the end of its life cycle..................... 247
Roof rack/ski rack................................ 92
Rubber piping (warnings) ................... 211
S.B.R. (system) .................................... 109
Safety ...................................................... 107
Saving fuel.............................................. 138
Seat belts
– general warnings............................ 111
– load limiters.................................... 110
– maintenance.................................... 112
– seat belts not fastened warning
light................................................... 147
– use .................................................... 108
Seats
– adjustment “at the table”............. 40
– cleaning ............................................ 215
– electrically adjusted front ........... 41
– manually adjusted front ............... 39
– rear .................................................. 42
Side air bags .......................................... 122
– front and rear side chest
protection air bags (Side bags) .. 122
– head protection side air bags
(Window Bags) .............................. 122
– general warnings............................ 124
– turning off the front and rear side
chest protection air bags
(Side bags) ...................................... 123
– rear side chest protection air bag
warning lights (Rear Side Bags)
off ..................................................... 156
Smokers kit........................................... 76
Snow chains .......................................... 143
Spark plugs
– spark plug preheating failure
warning light ................................... 150
– spark plug preheating warning
light................................................... 150
Spark plugs (type) ................................ 221
Speedometer ........................................ 21
Starting and driving.............................. 127
Performance ......................................... 231
Plates
– body paint ....................................... 219
– identification data .......................... 218
Pollen filter (replacement)................. 207
Position lights
– control ............................................. 62
– front lamp replacement................ 174
– position light warning light .......... 154
– rear lamp replacement ................. 177
Power steering
– failure warning light....................... 149
– liquid................................................. 205
Power steering liquid
– level check....................................... 205
Power steering liquid level................. 205
Power supply
– Technical data ................................ 223
Presetting for “Isofix Universale”
car seat installation .......................... 117
Pretensioners........................................ 110
– load limiters.................................... 110
– warnings........................................... 111
Provided tools ...................................... 162
Radio frequency remote control:
Ministerial Certification ................... 241
Radio transmitters and cell phones . 101
Rain sensor............................................ 66
Rear armrest......................................... 75
Rear ceiling lights
– control ............................................. 70
– lamp replacement.......................... 181
246
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 246
Transmission
– Technical data ................................ 223
Transporting children safely .............. 112
Trip computer...................................... 36
Turn signals
– control ............................................. 63
– cornering lights .............................. 63
– front lamp replacement................ 174
– lane change function ..................... 63
– left turn signal warning light ........ 154
– rear lamp replacement ................. 176
– right turn signal warning light ..... 154
– side lamp replacement.................. 175
Tyre pressure....................................... 228
Tyres
– correct tyre reading...................... 225
– provided ......................................... 227
– snow................................................. 142
– wheel replacement........................ 159
User purchased accessories ............ 101
Vehicle inactivity................................. 144
Vehicle lifting......................................... 190
Vehicle refuelling.................................. 103
Vehicle towing...................................... 191
Volumetric protection........................ 15
Warning lights and messages .......... 145
– general warnings............................ 146
Weight ................................................... 232
Wheel
– Fix & go automatic rapid tyre
repair kit ......................................... 165
– replacement.................................... 159
– spare (characteristics) .................. 227
Wheel alignment.................................. 225
Wheel rims
– correct rim reading....................... 226
Wheels and tyres................................. 210
– cold inflating pressure................... 228
– correct rim reading....................... 226
– correct tyre reading...................... 225
– rims and tyres ................................ 225
– rims and tyres ................................ 227
– spare wheel..................................... 225
– wheel alignment............................. 225
Window cleaning ................................. 65
Windows (cleaning) ............................ 215
Windscreen washer
– control ............................................. 65
– liquid level ....................................... 205
Windscreen washer/rear window
washer-wiper/headlight
washer-wiper liquid
– level check....................................... 205
Windscreen washer/rear window
washer-wiper/headlight
washer-wiper liquid level................. 205
Windscreen wiper
– brushes ............................................ 212
– control ............................................. 65
– rain sensor ...................................... 66
– sprayers ........................................... 213
Windscreen wiper and rear window
wiper brushes .................................... 212
Starting the engine............................... 128
– coasting startup.............................. 159
– heating the just started engine.... 130
– ignition device ................................ 17
procedure for gasoline versions... 128
procedure for Multijet versions ... 129
startup with an auxiliary battery... 158
– turning off the engine ................... 130
Steering (characteristics).................... 224
Steering lock ......................................... 19
Steering wheel (adjustment).............. 43
Storage box........................................... 76
Sun roof ................................................. 78
Sun visor................................................ 77
Suspensions (characteristics)............. 224
Symbols.................................................. 8
T.P.M.S. system
(tyre pressure control).................... 99
Table (seat) ........................................... 40
Tachometer .......................................... 20
Technical data....................................... 217
Trailer towing....................................... 139
– assembly diagram........................... 141
– tow hook installation.................... 140
– warnings........................................... 139
Transmission
– automatic transmission failure
warning light ................................... 155
– maximum automatic transmission
oil temperature warning light ..... 155
– using the automatic electronic
transmission.................................... 133
– using the manual transmission.... 132
247
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
DASHBOARD
AND CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CAR
MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
IINDEX
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 247
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONS
DASHBOARD
The presence and the position of the instruments and warning lights may vary according to the versions.
1. Side air vent - 2. Right steering column stalk: windscreen, rear window wiper and trip computer controls - 3. Instrument panel
and warning lights - 4. Left steering column stalk: external lights - 5. Central air vents - 6. Sound system - 7. Front passenger air bag -
8. Glovebox - 9. Heating/ventilation/climate controls - 10. Gearshift lever - 11. Cruise control lever - 12. Driver’s knees air bag -
13. Driver’s air bag - 14. Control unit access door - 15. Control plate.
F0L0517m
fig. 1
248
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 248
249
INSTRUMENT PANEL
F0L0509m
fig. 2
F0L0508m
1.8 - 1.9 Multijet 8V versions with
multifunctional display
A Speedometer (speed indicator)
B Fuel level gauge with reserve
warning light
C Engine coolant temperature gauge
and excessive temperature warning
light
D Rev counter
E multifunctional display
m
c
Warning lights fitted on
Multijet versions
t
Warning light fitted on versions
with automatic transmission
1.8 - 1.9 Multijet
8V with
reconfigurable multifunctional display
A Speedometer (speed indicator)
B Fuel level gauge with reserve
warning light
C Engine coolant temperature gauge
and excessive temperature warning
light
D Rev counter
E Reconfigurable multifunctional display
m
c
Warning lights fitted on
Multijet versions
t
Warning light fitted on versions
with automatic transmission
On versions 1.8 the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 8000 rpm.
On versions 1.8 the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 8000 rpm.
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 249
F0L0511m
fig. 3
F0L0510m
2.2 - 1.9 Multijet 16V versions -
2.4 Multijet
20V with multifunctional
display
A Speedometer (speed indicator)
B Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light
C Engine coolant temperature gauge and
excessive temperature warning light
D Rev counter
E Multifunctional display
m
c
Warning lights fitted on Multijet
versions
t
Warning light fitted on versions with
automatic transmission
2.2 - 1.9 Multijet
16V - 2.4 Multijet 20V
with reconfigurable multifunctional
display
A Speedometer (speed indicator)
B Fuel level gauge with reserve warning
light
C Engine coolant temperature gauge and
excessive temperature warning light
D Rev counter
E Reconfigurable multifunctional display
m
c
Warning lights fitted on Multijet
versions
t
Warning light fitted on versions with
automatic transmission
On Multijet versions the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 6000 rpm.
On Multijet versions the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 6000 rpm.
250
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 250
PROVISIONS FOR THE PROCESSING OF A VEHICLE
AT THE END OF ITS LIFE-CYCLE
For years now Fiat has been developing its global commitment towards the safeguarding and protection of the Environment through
the continuous improvement of its production processes and the making of increasingly more “eco friendly” products. With a view to
guaranteeing the best possible service to clients in full observance of environmental standards and in response to the obligations im-
posed by European Directive 2000/53/EC on end-of-life vehicles, Fiat offers its clients the possibility to hand in their vehicle* at the end
of its life span without additional costs.
The European Directive, in fact, provides for the take-back of the vehicle without the last holder or owner of the same incurring
expenses due to the fact that the market value of the vehicle is zero or negative. In particular, in almost all of the countries of the
European Union, up until 1st January 2007, take-back of the vehicle free of charge only applies to vehicles registered from 1 July 2002
on, while, from 2007 on, take-back will be carried out free of charge, independently of the year of registration, provided that the vehi-
cle still contains all its essential component parts (especially engine and body) and is free from additional waste materials.
Our contracted network of authorised treatment facilities has been carefully selected in order to provide a quality service to our cus-
tomers by de-polluting and recycling “End of Life Vehicles” to approved environmental standards. To find out the location of your
nearest authorised treatment facility, offering free of charge take-back, simply contact one of our dealers or refer to the Fiat web site
or call the toll free number 00800 3428 0000.
*
Passenger transportation vehicles to seat a max. of nine persons, having a total admissible weight of 3.5 t
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 251
N
N
O
O
T
T
E
E
S
S
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 252
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 253
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 254
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 255
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Customer Services - Technical Services - Service Engineering - Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)
Print N. 603.81.575 - 07/2009 - 2 edition
FUEL CAPACITY Tank capacity: 62 litres Riserve: 7 - 9 litres
Only refuel cars with petrol engines with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95.
Only refuel cars with diesel engines with diesel fuel for motor vehicles conforming to the EN590 European Specification
STANDARD TYRES SPARE
Versions Size Medium load Full load WHEEL
Front Rear Front Rear
205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
1.8 215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 4.2
215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.6
205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.8 2.7
215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5
2.2
215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
4.2
225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
2.2 a.t.
215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5
1.9 Multijet 8V
215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5
4.2
225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5
205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.8 2.7
215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5
1.9 Multijet
16V
215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
4.2
225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5
205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5
1.9 Multijet 16V a.t.
215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6
4.2
225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5
2.4 Multijet
20V
a.t.
215/50 R17 95W 2.6 2.5 2.9 2.7
4.2
225/45 R18 95W 2.6 2.5 2.8 2.6
COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)
ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT
2.2 2.2 a.t. 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t.
litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg
Sump and filter 5 5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.4
243-256 Croma TRW GB 28-07-2009 12:15 Pagina 256
237


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules
1

Forum

fiat-croma
  • Fiat Croma II 2009m pagaminta.Reikia pakeisti priekiniu desines p.dureliu isorine rankena.Kaip tai padaryti? Submitted on 10-6-2022 at 20:22

    Reply Report abuse


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Fiat Croma at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Fiat Croma in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 5,97 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Fiat Croma

Fiat Croma User Manual - German - 254 pages

Fiat Croma User Manual - Dutch - 242 pages

Fiat Croma User Manual - French - 254 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info